Home

CPro-2000 User Manual - Alcatel

1. oW K K set th sts 1 See SpecCond 630 352 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table for DDM 3 with TL1 continued mS Im rr set t3 P bit EC SEFS set 3 SpecCond 630 OOF FEND X X X X X X CVP FEND X X X X X X ESP FEND X X X X X X SESP FEND X X X X X X UASP FEND X X X X X X SESF Perf set th t3 See SpecCond 630 CVL NEND X X X X X X ESL NEND X X X X X X SESL NEND X X X X X X OOF NEND X CVP NEND X ESP NEND X SESP NEND X UASP NEND X Perf set th vtl See SpecCond 630 V5 ESP V5 SES P V5 UAS P Perf set th t See SpecCond 630 DAY ESL NEND DAY CVP NEND DAY ESP NEND DAY SESP NEND DAY UASP NEND DAY CVP FEND DAY ESP FEND DAY SESP FEND DAY UASP FEND CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 353 pA pA pA oW pA oW oW oW pA Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table for DDM OC 3 with TL1 continued Area Ord Restore Backup Parameter Special
2. K gt Perf __ 11 SET PM STIME RTRV PM STIME start hour Td 374 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table FT 2000 with TL1 continued Parameter Special Conditions FT FT FT FT 6 0 7 0 7 1 7 2 SpecCond 640 Restore Cmd Backup Cmd ENT ECI RTRV ECI CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 level optlinecde wavinth pyldfrmlgx pyldtolgx opoc3frmlgx opoc3tolgx proc3frmlgx proc3tolgx opoc 1 2frmlgx opoc 1 2tolgx proc12frmlgx proc12tolgx SWprty actswprty gueswprty ntfcncde sdthr pst sst fmtZASYNC linecde ntfcncde omode pbit sdthr PMmode pst sst for oc3frmlgx for oc3tolgx for oc12frmlgx for ocI2tolgx p fm is provision as auto K XM XM gt X X X X gt lt gt lt gt lt K gt lt pA KK Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters 375 Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table FT 2000 with TL1 conti
3. X X X X X X X X X X gt gt pA X Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM with Restore Backup Cmd 52 Switch O Product ID Switch O lt 5 5 K 0 tmout SSS _ uap msgtype d Comm 3 ent osacmap RTRV OSACMAP VC SNPA ACID ent ulsdcc RTRV ULSDCC KK KK System 1 ent sys RTRV SYS TID DSNE GNE Site NE co rt selector tbos link tbos addr tbrem idle agne almgrp cross connect mode Shelf X 25 packet size dd d d d 360 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Backup Restore Commands Parameters Rele
4. 176 enda qi GS Le 176 Subnetwork VIEW E H 127 Inventory Subnetwork CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Window Menu 17 a ________________ 179 180 181 A oque TET ER 182 Zub n 183 WIC udi T 184 End to End Path Menu 185 ________ _ _ _ _____________ _ 185 Two Endpoint End to End Path Across a Single 186 Rinz AAS CVI CS 188 Enter a VT1 5 Two way Ring Transport Service End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 3 and DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 mixed ring when OC 3 is equipped with 24G U OLIU 189 Enter a VT1 5 T1 Two way End to End Path FiberReach 193 Enter an STS 1 Two way Ring Transport Service End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 and OC 12 OC 3 mixed ring when OC 3 is equipped with 24G U 196 Enter an STS 3C Two way End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 12 and 12 3 mixed ring when OC 3 15 equipped with 24G U OLIU 200 Enter an STS 3 Two way End to End Path FT 2000 OC 48 only 205 Enter an STS 3 One way End to End Path FT 2000 OC 48 only
5. 264 DDM 2000 Interoffice 264 FT 2000 Interoffice 264 Enter STS 1 Four Node Interworking End to End Path DDM 2000 only 265 Enter VT1 5 Four Node Interworking End to End Path DDM 2000 3 oig TP yas 212 Enter an STS 3 Two way Four Node Interworking End to End Path 2000 OC 48 only Morc 278 Delete End to End PAID er ep ETE SUPE UEM RUNE 284 Modi NOC TE 285 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Contents v Alarms Menu 287 Dea a 287 Auto Alarm doli T 288 Audible Alai MS 289 Acknowledging an 1 290 RT 291 CT CLC WCC gia 292 bringe O 292 L Dac AIDE pa p it The Call List Tab 293 iti The T A EEE MS 299 300 Troubleshooting 303 304 Windows NT has different default directory for Save and Capture 304 CPro 2000 r
6. 324 Appendix C FT 2000 OC 48 TL1 Commands 325 2000 OC 48 User Service Manual Command 325 EAE E O A E M 323 The Cross kelcrence 325 2000 OC 48 User Service Manual Task Oriented 328 328 The Cross Reference Table for Tasks Supported CPro 2000 328 Appendix D Script and Batch Files 329 S vau Q 22 SUDORE CA le 330 330 GI 330 330 PAUSET 330 DIALCA NC 330 EE TRIS 331 se 8 331 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Contents vii viii e Contents USER UN eru 332 String 332 mP 222 332 TEMP Po d M A A AE 332 SOTO EI T ____ ____ 334 e gt ______ gt 333 ING 333 Ibi 333 _ ____
7. 16 PETZ UE E ones E EE E 18 CPro 2000 Startup 21 OVEN T 2l Physical AC ONNECHONS s ______ 24 DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 Access via CIT 21 FT 2000 OC 48 Access via CIT 22 DDM 2000 3 12 Access via X 25 22 ET 2000 OC 45 Access via 25 22 AG Pate MT P 22 Pai e a E 22 25 PROC CSI The S DOLI uro 25 Selecting Communications Options from the GUI 22 Selecting Communications Options from the AUI 0010 2 27 Connecbmb 21 i Connecting to an NE Using Login F4 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Contents ii e Contents Connecting to an NE esses 30 iii Connecting to an NE via a 3l The User Interfaces 33 gag m c 22 Introduction to the User 33 Using the Interfaces
8. X TID agne address dsne address 5 or cit or cit baud tl1 dce a 1 dte a NN System ENT SYS RTRV NID DSNE Kills remote logins if changed GNE AGNE ALMGRP 0 to 255 X25PS 256 or 128 protocol pp Security 2 RTRV CID SECU Not all parameters portstat apply to dte dce dcc gnetid and x25 Backup uid whatever reported 72 HE X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 7 1 NE NE X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X NE X X X X X X X X X X CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 369 Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table FT 2000 with TL1 continued Security ENT CID SECU RTRV SECU Only restore backup tmout parameters porttype baudrate chan ostype calladdr ENT CID SECU Ll ____ Only for dte and vcO portacc of dcc mE Comm 3 ENT ASGNMT DCC RIRV ASGNMEDCC Dropsremotelinks CON ort sa RTRV OC3 ntfcncde syncmsg oc3frmlgx oc3tolgx sdthr sst 370 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 5 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table FT 2000 with TL1 continued Rest
9. P 1 The following is an example of the CPro 2000 GUI when the local node is an Optical Line System OLS CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The User Interfaces e 37 amp ccoss Eck iw Repo Erevision Update Window arms Help je S ubhncbeeoak View F HOH BEACHI Optical Linc E Mel Hon OLS The following is example of the CPro 2000 GUI when the local node is a DDM 2000 12 2000 H6 2 GUI Subnetwork View Access Edi View Repot End End Path Window Alarms Help 2 lae 2 0012 4 DDM 2000 00 12 H5 1 2 mb1 gt fn c gt An c The following is example of a 2000 GUI when the local node 15 a FiberReach 38 The User Interfaces CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 REDE LIE AULEM Buil gm zu iur Dentro Det Mete Ptr Dial a BIA Hz Do 1 HI ah Fit 1 E E 71 l3 5 p The following is an example of CPro 2000 GUI when the local node 15 an 2000 48 CPro 2000 R6 2 GUI Subnetwork View D x Access Edi View Repot EndToEndPath Update Window Alarms Help a ee 2 F SYC FT3 5151 FT 2000 OC 48 R7 2 Mel Subnetwork View A 5VvE FT3 Subnetwork View The CPro 2000 GUI contains a Subnetwork View
10. Node Manager 8 CNW View uH P 1 OC3 6 DDK 2000 OC 3 Rel 11 1 2111 OC3 F DDM 2000 OC 3 Hel 11 1 4111 Login Update Switch To Update Inventory Close NodeMan 2 There are several different tasks you can accomplish from this point For example scroll down and click on the F5 7 5A NE to select it The Map Partition Inventory Partition and Login buttons become available as shown in the following screen Node Manager Logout Switch To Inventory Partition Close NodeMan 66 The Access Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 3 discover a partition containing this NE click on either Map Partition Inventory Partition A new partition 15 created and displayed on the Subnetwork View The next time you access the Node Manager it shows that there are now two discovered partitions in the subnetwork Mode Manager E e 5 5 NW MView P 1 20100 OC 3 Hel 11 1 2 0 3 00 2000 OC 3 Hel 11 1 4111 Login Update Switch To Update Inventory Close NodeMan 4 From this screen you can select several tasks as described in the following list Note that the notation L next to an NE means that you are currently logged into it SERRRRRRRRRRASRRARRRRRRRRARARSRARREE Close e Click on
11. 051 123456789012 3458 stz3 lu b sts3 le 5 1URn LOCR DSL 123456789H12345D LOCZ D5L 123456 789812345 The user can benefit from the AUI by using it as a dumb terminal connected to an NE Any functionality that is not yet available in CPro 2000 can be accessed through expert mode which consists of clicking in the AUI window and typing the appropriate commands NOTE You must click inside the AUI window to activate the AUI cursor The cursor does not automatically appear when you change focus to the AUI or click on one of the AUI menu items The AUI also provides the user with a powerful terminal emulator that can be used for many tasks other than connecting to a subnetwork NOTE Commands that affect the state of equipment or cross connections in the NE can cause the GUI and the AUI to become unsynchronized After working in the AUI it is always advisable to update the GUI by reissuing the Partition Inventory or the NE Inventory command see the section titled Using the Interfaces Together earlier in this chapter The AUI can also be used to set up and save modem specifications through the use of the Communications menu The user can enter the modem type and dial string in the Modem Commands dialog box SLC 2000 Access The CPro 2000 AUI can be used to control the low speed side of an SLC 2000 After logging into the SLC 2000 type dlc in the AUI dlc stands for digital loop
12. 4 E HBA SSS SES Enter 575 1 One way End to End Path FT 2000 OC 48 Release 7 X only Procedure 1 From the End to End Path Menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click on the tabs for STS1 signal rate and 1WAY path type Enter End To End Path 3 Made Inbwk 218 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 NOTE When the Audit On box is checked the alarm feature which notifies the user of signal problem is activated To turn off this feature click on the box to remove the check mark 2 Atthe bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose an add node Double click on the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot Ea 3 Select the low speed slot to be used for this add node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen is correct click on OK The following screen appears Choose the Tributary sts1 1e 1 1 stz1 1e 1 2 sts1 1e 1 3 stz1 1e 2 1 stz1 1e 2 2 sts1 1e 2 3 stz1 1e 3 1 stz1 1e 3 2 sts1 1e 3 3 sts1 1e 4 1 sts1 le 4 2 sts1 1le 4 3 sts1 1e 5 1 pies ee ae 4 Select the tributary that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid tributary number
13. 64 Bos 64 m 65 Node ULIS assis 65 Ron 68 OF a ON 69 C lose ___ 69 Suc 69 69 The Edit Menu 71 21 BU TT ______ _________ 6_ _ _ _____ 71 POO E A E EE E E E E EE 74 78 E 79 E E 80 cnc DOLO 80 View Menu 83 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 __ 83 SICH 83 jio 84 Silo P 1 SRNR E 84 li PEU mM ____ ____ ______ algae 84 Sle AO a A Wy ses cerc tas os suerte 84 ceci i cT 85 The Report Menu 89 cag T 99 Report Screen FUNCIONS gt 91 i a E A A _ 92 CtoS Connell oS 93 K SA 6
14. 209 Enter an STS 1 Two way End to End Path FT 2000 OC 48 Release 7 X only 214 Enter an STS 1 One way End to End Path FT 2000 OC 48 Release 7 only 218 Video Service End to End Paths lessen enne ener Enter STS 3C Video Service End to End Path DDM 2000 12 12 OC 3 mixed ring when OC 3 is equipped with 24G U OLIU 223 Locked Arc End to End PA Enter a VT1 5 Locked Arc End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 3 9 11 X and EiberRea3clr oily 228 Enter a VT1 5 T1 Locked End to End Path FiberReach only 233 Three Node Interworking End to End Paths Access Ring Application 221 Enter STS 1 Three Node Interworking End to End Path DDM 2000 only 239 Enter a VT1 5 Three Node Interworking End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 3 aud PIBEPISCHCIE OBL 244 Enter an STS 3C Three Node Interworking End to End Path DDM 2000 OS T 248 Enter an STS 3 One way Three Node Interworking End to End Path rudi rm 254 Enter an STS 3 Two way Three Node Interworking End to End Path EO OC S 259 Four Node Interworking End to End Paths Interoffice Ring Application
15. 1 4 i End to End Path may be incomplete if the ring open Open rings will have cross connects on the high speed or parent ring 9 Click on OK then click Cancel in the End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The screen below shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 221 2000 HB5 2 GUI L501 FT3 5151 FT 2000 0 48 2 Access Edit View Provision Update Window Connes Alarms Help 85 5 2 5 5151 FT 2000 0C 48 BH 7 2 Mel x E 5151 FT 2000 OC 48 7 2 Video Service End to End Paths CPro 2000 offers the feature of Video Service Paths in DDM 2000 OC 12 NEs Video paths are created using STS 3C cross connections NOTE You must purchase the DDM 2000 OC 12 STS 3C feature package to have this capability See your Lucent Technologies account representative for details The STS 3C feature allows concatenation of three STS 1 signals into a single STS 3C signal and cross connection at the STS 3C rate T wo cross connection types support Video Service paths Video Source and Video Sink Video paths look like one way paths because they only use one rotation of the ring They always contain one source at the add location and a sink at the drop location There can be more than one sink or drop in a video path as shown in the following illustration Because a video
16. Differences equipment differences were found between the backup file and the network element Hardware Switch Settinz Differences hardware swiich setting differences were found between the backup file and the network element Login Mames from the backup file 4 NOTE CPro 2000 sends commands to discover the current equipage and hardware switch settings in the selected NE and compares this information with the corresponding information in the existing backup file The above report 15 generated to display any differences that are found 6 Click on the Close button to close the report The following screen appears 22 22 2222 22 EE RR E 22 22 22 22 EE RR 22 22 22 EE 22 of the cross connection may affect service CPro will remove all the cross connectons and disable the Feature options to restare the network element Deletion Do you wish to continue with the restore NOTE To assure the success of the restore operation it is necessary for CPro 2000 to remove existing cross connections and feature data so as not to conflict with the restore comm
17. OC3 6 Twoway Add Drop Node Selected Low Speed b 1 2 Tributary m 3 2 3 Note The RTS Path can contain 0 or 1 Twoways any number of Dual 0x13 and pairs of Single 15 A valid pair of Single Ox1s is one to the service slot and the other to the protection slot 5 You are prompted to select the next add drop node Double click on the desired node The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 191 Choose the Low Speed Slot 6 Select the low speed slot for this add drop node Click on OK The main end to end path form appears Enter End To End Path gt Twoway Ring Transport Locked Arc Twoway Add Drop Node Selected Low Speed a 1 1 Tributary m 1 1 1 Twoway Add Drop Node Selected Low Speed a 1 1 Note The RTS Path can contain 0 or 1 Twoways any number of Dual 0x13 and pairs of Single 0 1 valid pair of Single Ox1s is one to the service slot and the other to the protection slot E oh 7 Ifthe information you have selected is correct click OK to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Enter End T o End Path Es e Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want continue 192 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 8 Click on No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will b
18. OPR ACO Operate Alarm Cutoff OPR LPBK ECI Operate Loopback ECI 1 OPRILPBKTI Operate Loopback TI OPRIPBKT3 jOperaeLlooppakT3 RESET RLS LPBK ECI Release Loopback ECI RLS LPBK T1 Release Loopback T1 RLS LPBK T3 Release Retrieve Attribute Alarm RTRV ATTR CONT_ Retrieve Attribute Control RTRV ATTR ENV Retrieve Attribute Environment Connections RTRV CRS VTI Retrieve Cross Connection VT1 5 Update Cross RTRV ECI Retrieve EC 1 Reports EC 1 RTRV EQPT Retrieve Equipment Update Network Element Inventory RTRV FEAT Retrieve Feature i o RTRV FECOM Retrieve Far End Communications E RTRV HSTY Retrieve History Reports History PRTRV LGN PRTRV LINK 2 RTRV NE si Retrieve Network Element Retrieve Network Map RTRV PASSWD Retrieve Password RTRV PM LINE Retrieve Performance MonitoringLine RTRV PM SECT Retrieve Performance Monitoring Section Data STS 1PM Data DS1 RTRV PM T3 Retrieve Performance Monitoring T3 Reports PM Data DS3PM 316 Appendix A DDM 2000 OC 3 Commands CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Description CPro 2000 Menu Item RTRV PM TCA Retrieve Performance Monitoring TCA Data VT 1PM EMSS tenet Threshold Line dE Threshold Section EMSS Threshold STS
19. e Enter STS 1 Cross Connections 2000 OC 48 Release 7 Xonly Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click on the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The cross connection must be established in the Add direction In other words the source must be a low speed slot and the destination must be a tributary The following screen appears when you release the mouse button Cross Connection Properties Src AID gt Dest AID Is 1b 1 gt sts1 le 7 3 Audit On NOTE When Audit On is chosen an alarm is activated to notify the user of any signal problem See Audit On Option earlier in this chapter CPro 2000 User ManualRelease6 2 Gross Connections 141 2 Click on Cancel if the AIDs shown in the screen are incorrect Select the DRI cross connection icon third from left hand side of toolbar in the Cross Connections Properties dialog box Select the Source and Destination TIDs from the down arrow lists Click on OK and the following screen appears Confirm Cross Connection Enter Enter Oneway DRI Is 1b 1 sts1 le f 3 4 1 Caution Execution of this command may affect service 3 Click on Yes if you want to establish the cross connection Click on No if you do not want to establish this cross connection Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 4
20. gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table FT 2000 with TL1 continued Prov ENT PROT STSI RTRV PROT STSI PROTACC no STS3 NE in ring Prov ENT PROT STS3 RTRV PROT STSI PROTACC at least 1 STS3 NE in ring ENT PROT Line RTRV PROT Line WTR ENT PROT LS RTRV PROT LS WTR RTRV STATE use RTRV STATE only to restore NPPA FT X Prov Prov E Prov 10 X X X SW State actswprty RTRV PTHTRC sts1 status label INCTRC Prov Prov ENT STSI RTRV PTHTRC sts 1 EXPTRC TRC Po 640 0 X X X 10 SET TH ECI RTRV TH ECI montype thlev locn dirn imper tcarpt 1 SET TH OC3 RTRV TH OC3 montype thlev locn dirn imper tcarpt CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 373 o h X X X Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table FT 2000 with TL1 continued perf SET TH T3 RTRV TH T3 10 10 10 10 11 montype thlev locn dirn imper tcarpt montype thlev locn dirn imper tcarpt montype thlev locn dirn imper tcarpt montype thlev locn dirn imper tcarpt K gt
21. CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 187 Add Drop Node2 n iid Ring Transport Service In Ring Transport Service the NEs in one ring are used to provide service for NEs in another ring One ring 15 at a higher signal rate than the other ring The function units in one or two of the NEs in the ring with the higher signal rate connect to the mains of one or two NEs in the ring with the lower signal rate Because connectivity is established through the mains the connection is always optical The ring at the higher signal rate is called the parent and it is this ring that provides the transport for the other ring shown as Ring 1 in the following illustration The other ring the child ring 18 incomplete without the parent ring because the fibers in the child ring do not form a complete circle on their own This is known as an open ring Ring Transport Service is applicable to the following configurations 2000 OC 48 can provide transport to DDM 2000 OC 3 ring DDM 2000 OC 3 can provide transport to a FiberReach ring DDM 2000 OC 12 can provide dual and single homed transport to DDM 2000 OC 3 ring The following sample illustration shows two NEs in the parent ring connected to two NEs in the child ring This is called dual homing Single homing is when the function unit of one NE in the parent ring is connected to two mains in the child ring 188 The E
22. cross connection appears the Network Element View as shown in the following sample Note that the primary cross connection 15 shown with a solid black line and the secondary cross connection is shown with a dashed line 4 5751 FT 2UUU OC AN R70 142 Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Enter STS 3 Multi Drop Cross Connections FT 2000 OC 48 only Procedure l From the Network Element View click on the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The following screen appears when you release the mouse button Cross Connection Properties Src AID Dest AID sts3 1e 6 gt Is 5a x Cancel 2 Click on Cancel if the AIDs shown in the screen are incorrect Select the Multi 3 drop cross connection icon right hand side of toolbar The following screen appears immediately Choose Low Speed Slots While holding down the Shift key or Control Key select the multiple low speed slots for the cross connection destination Click on OK NOTE Pressing the Shift key allows a contiguous range of slots to be selected with the mouse Pressing the Control key allows a noncontiguous range to be selected 4 The Cross Connection Properties box redisplays Select the Source TIDs from the down arrow list Click on OK
23. 1 port addresses or AIDs for the current node is displayed Choose one 3 Once a port address or AID is chosen click on Get Value to see how the port is currently provisioned If a port address or AID 15 chosen that contains the value all then the Get Value button is not available because it applies to more than one set of port provisioning parameters 4 To update values use the down arrow list at each text box and choose the appropriate values for each option 5 Click on Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click on Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made Provisioning LS Port Options FT 2000 OC 48 only Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select LS Ports The following dialog box displays provided that there is at least one low speed circuit pack in the current node LS Port Provisioning Enter LS Option Parameters Protection Switching Priority Set Value 2 Choose a port AID by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the port AID box A list of all port AIDs for the current node is displayed Choose one 3 Once a port AID is chosen click on Get Value to see how the port is currently provisioned If a port AID is chosen that contains the value all then the Get Value button is not available because it applies to more than one set of port provisioning parameters
24. 34 The Graphical User Interface 34 34 35 ditor e 35 The Dialog 36 GUL 36 SUING PW 39 Tho Network BICBICHE 40 ASCH User later ace AD D 43 Printime Report and M DOCEO WG cops euge oso te ortas nde ado utn UIDI S CoA M UN 46 Piin poi ae 46 Petro WV Debet DUE s Ue MEME RAO 47 Task Mapping 49 PIO W 60 0711 9 NET RR 49 p _______________ S 49 Access Menu 57 gu 57 New 55 ______________ _ _______ 58 Open SUSE OLN qo TT U 60 Close to Dun E LUI IRE 61 menn beni pan dictan vea NUI NM 62 By A Sorsi ____ __ ___ pn 62 VV _____ __ __ 63 V RU 64 NOSE I
25. 4 Timeslot Usage Purpose To display a report that indicates where cross connections currently exist and where time slots are available for paths to be created This command option is only available from the Subnetwork View CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Report Menu 93 As described in Report Screen Functions earlier in this chapter you can perform a variety of tasks on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report NOTE A Partition Inventory must be taken before the Timeslot Usage report can be generated Procedure 1 From the Report pull down menu select Timeslot Usage A report similar to the following appears L Usage eger 11 1443 Fri cond abus 2 00 7 mrecik danti we UTE eee ee ea TT The following designations appear in the Timeslot Usage report e X equals across connection that does not form a path also known as a dangling cross connection e P equals a complete valid path e L equals a locked cross connection DDM 2000 OC 3 R9 11 and FiberReach only 94 e The Report Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Path Provisioning Errors 2000 OC 48 Purpose To view a report that contains information about path provisioning errors in the current partition This command option 1s only available from
26. SET STATE STSI 5 5 515 5 4 02 SET STATE T3 5 5 3 5 1 5 14 1 444 SET SYNC si Set Synchronization SSET VTI sevri5 2 SWITCH FN Protection Switch Function Unit SWITCH LINE Protection Switch Line SWITCHLS Protection Switch Low Speed SWITCH PATH STSI Switch Path STS 1 SWITCH PATH VTI Switch Path VTLS 0 SWITCH SYNC Protection Switch Synchronization PTEST ALM Test Office Alarm 0 TEST AUTO JTestAuoTunup 02 TEST LED jJTesLEDIndiators TEST SYSCTL Test System Controllers TEST TLM PAR Test Telemetry Parallel TEST TLM SER Test TelemetrySerial _TEST TRMSN T1 Test Transmission TU o ooo _TEST TRMSN T3 Test Transmission T3 02 14 DDM 2000 OC 3 User Service Manual Task Oriented Procedures Purpose The purpose of this section 15 to provide a cross reference between the Task Oriented Procedures TOPs section of Issue 5 of the Lucent Technologies DDM 2000 OC 3 User Service Manual and the menu items of CPro 2000 318 Appendix A DDM 2000 OC 3 Commands CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Reference Table for Tasks Supported 2000 The following table provides a cross reference between the CPro 2000 capabilities and the DDM 2000 OC 3 TOPs Not every step in every one of the identified TOPs may be supported i
27. 3 Intwk 4 Intwk Add Drop Node OC3 1 Selected Low Speed a 1 1 1 Tributary m 1 1 1 At the bottom of the form you are prompted to choose the Primary Node Double click on the node you have selected The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 245 Choose the Low Speed Slot 7 Select the low speed slot for the Primary Node from the scroll list Only valid slot numbers are displayed Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the Primary Node information you have selected Enter End To End Path 3 Hode Intwk 4 Add Drop Node OC3 1 Selected Low Speed 1 1 1 Tributary m 1 1 1 Primary Mode 2 8 At the bottom of the form you are prompted to select the Secondary Node Double click on the node you have selected The following screen appears 246 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Choose the Low Speed Slot 9 Select the low speed slot for the Secondary Node Click on OK The main end to end path form displays Enter End To End Path 3 Hode Intwk 4 Intwk Add Drop Node OC3 1 Selected Low Speed 1 1 1 Tributary m 1 1 1 Primary Mode 2 10 If the information you have selected is correct click on OK to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Enter End To End Path Es e Caution Ex
28. EE 93 Path Provisioning Errors FT 2000 48 0880000 95 Patis m Tributary 4E E 2000 OCAS tud pec ie EO E 96 BA OE E E 7 T 98 99 100 E E 101 Protection State FT 2000 OC 48 R7 1 and 7 2 1 102 DOLLS 102 PM Data DDM 2000 3 DDM 2000 12 and 2000 OC 48 R6 0 104 AWOPT OLS OMY TE 106 ONIY eE EEE O EEE E EEE 107 EEEE AE EEEE 108 Secon Trace OLS ea E E 108 Cross Connections 111 Bea Wy rc tera 111 Cross onec ONC one talon CIEN 111 Creating Ranges of Cross Change LocA LocZ and Roll STS 3 and STS 1 Cross Connections 112 Audit On Option FT 2000 112 Cross Connecuon Deletion o Uem onu I Ig Ma de Duo IM RD Maa 112 Faten Cross CCODICPEIORS Ea FUNDADA RN E MORD INE 113 Enter STS 1 Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 and FiberReach R2 2 equipped with 28G U OLIU in the 11
29. For all NE types enter your user ID and press the Tab key Enter your password and press the Tab key CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 NOTE See the appropriate network element documentation for procedures how to change your user ID See The Edit Menu chapter for the procedure on how to change a password or TID If you want to use a script other than the default click on the Browse button to display the Select A Script File dialog box The following screen appears Select Script File ds 17 scr AG ddm scr progr EJ 2 __ modem scr Hctwork List of type Drives Script Files scr ac 4 Select one of the existing data communications scripts depending on your application In most cases DEFAULT SCR should be used however the script selected should be appropriate for the data communications facilities being used to talk to the NE and the subnetwork Click on OK to select this script NOTE Although certain default script files are provided with the CPro 2000 software scripts can also be created by the user see Appendix D Script and Batch Files for information on writing script files Any new script files should be thoroughly tested 5 Login dialog box redisplays with the appropriate script file Click on OK NOTE If you receive an error message at this point such as Inval
30. Hew TID 2 in the new TID and click on OK NOTE A TID consists of a string of alphanumeric characters See the NE documentation for a list of the restrictions on the TID character set Change Password Purpose To change a CPro 2000 user s NE password This screen also appears when an FT 2000 OC 48 NE password expires Procedure 1 From the Edit pull down menu select Change Password The following Change Password Dialog box appears Change Password 0C 3 7 Password Hew Password Cancel Reenter Password 2 in your current password the Old Password field and press the Tab key Note that asterisks appear instead of the actual password Type the new password in the New Password field and press the Tab key Reenter the new password in the Reenter Password field and click on OK NOTE The password consists of a string of alphanumeric or symbolic characters See your NE documentation for a list of the restrictions on the password character set 3 If any errors were made while typing in the old and new passwords an error message appears Reenter the passwords and click OK CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Edit Menu e 79 Switch DRI Purpose To execute the Dual Ring Interworking DRI manual switch in an FT 2000 OC 48 Procedure 1 From the Edit pull down menu select Switch DRI 2 The following screen appears Rename Partitio
31. To create a three node interworking end to end path access the End to End Path menu while in the Subnetwork View A form appears prompting the selection of the signal rate and path type The selection of these two options dynamically changes the form to reflect the information needed to create that specific type of path There are five types of three node interworking end to end paths supported by CPro 2000 5 5 three node interworking DDM 2000 VTI 5 three node interworking DDM 2000 OC 3 only STS 3 one way three node interworking FT 2000 OC 48 Releases 6 0 7 0 7 1 and 7 2 STS 3 two way three node interworking FT 2000 OC 48 Releases 6 0 7 0 7 1 and 7 2 5 5 three node FT 2000 OC 48 Releases 7 0 7 1 and 7 2 when ring is equipped with B5 optics See the following figure for an illustration of an FT 2000 OC 48 three node interworking two way end to end path in an access ring application low speed connections use the following packs DDM 2000 3 or STS 1E e FT 2000 3 OC 12 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 237 Add Drop Node The following procedures provide specific instructions on creating the four types of three node interworking end to end paths in an access ring application NOTE If the path being configured is a ring with linear extensions the path around the ring and the individual linear extension cros
32. e The Help Menu provides the user with help options Some menu items are displayed with an arrow gt after them Selection of these menu items displays another level of menus For example selecting Port Slot Options from the Reports pull down menu results in a submenu that allows the user to choose one of several options Some menu items have three ellipses eee after them Selection of these menu items displays a dialog box requesting further input from the user Non Preemptible Protection Access NPPA NPPA is a feature in FT 2000 OC 48 Release 7 1 and 7 2 which allows the protection tributaries to serve as non preemptible unprotected service tributaries while the corresponding service tributaries become unprotected FT 2000 R7 1 15 capable of handling NPPA at the STS 3 tributaries level while FT 2000 R7 2 15 capable of handling NPPA at the STS 1 tributaries level The network element views for FT 2000 OC 48 R7 1 and 7 2 are designed to display the NPPA status of the high speed tributaries In the case of FT 2000 R7 1 the NPPA status will be displayed at the STS 3 level In the case of FT 2000 R7 2 the status will be displayed at the STS 1 level The following color conventions are used to display the NPPA status e Yellow on the lower half of the high speed tributaries the normal service tributaries indicates that the tributary 1s unprotected e Yellow on the upper half of the high speed tributaries the normal prot
33. Alarms tThe Partition Inventory also retrieves the current alarm status of all the nodes in the partition and displays it in the GUI window How to Get a Partition Inventory When logging into the subnetwork see Accessing the Subnetwork later in this chapter place a check mark next to Partition Inventory in the Login dialog box The Partition Inventory is taken during the login Only the partition to which you logged into is inventoried If there are other partitions in the subnetwork you can inventory them through the Node Manager or if you did not choose to take a Partition Inventory during login you can use the Node Manager to take an inventory See Node Manager in The Access Menu chapter for further details CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 CPro 2000 Startup 23 24 CPro 2000 Startup During login CPro 2000 automatically discovers a partition if you choose Partition Inventory The first partition that CPro 2000 discovers contains the local node to which you are logged in You can use the Node Manager to access other partitions in your subnetwork As each partition is discovered it is numbered by CPro 2000 for example P 1 P 2 NOTE For details on how to customize partition names see Rename Partition in the Edit Menu chapter When partitions are initially discovered and therefore displayed in the Subnetwork View they are in an unexpanded format The unexpanded partition shows only the partition name and the spe
34. COE TN 38 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Alarms Purpose To display an alarm summary for the current node The alarms report option is only available from a Network Element View As described in Report Screen Functions earlier in this chapter you can perform a variety of tasks on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report Procedure 1 Click on the Alarm Status area in the Status Bar or from the Report pull down menu select Alarms A report similar to the following appears 2000 Alarh Report for OC3 7 2000 oc 3 BKaptenber 20 1999 J 17 27 7 Alarma and per t Alarm Bolas Dake lis BEY Leet Lp Leve addresz Detected CRITICAL fn c i i1 i 15 01 00 ura pected CP Eppa CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Report Menu 99 Purpose To display a history of events for the current node The history report option 15 only available from a Network Element View As described in Report Screen Functions earlier in this chapter you can perform a variety of tasks on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report Procedure 1 From the Report pull down menu select History The following screen appears History Report Selection 2 Choose Entire Report if you want to view the entire report or choos
35. Window Cascade Arranges Network Element Views and Shift F4 Subnetwork View in a cascade format Window Tile Horizontal Arranges Network Element Views and Shift F5 Subnetwork View in a horizontal format Window Tile Vertical Arranges Network Element Views and Shift F6 Subnetwork View in a vertical format Window Arrange Icons Arranges iconified windows in an orderly fashion Shift F7 at the bottom of the GUI window End to End Path Enter Establishes an end to end path Subnetwork View only End to End Path Delete Deletes an end to end path of any type Subnetwork View only End to End Modifies the LocA and LocZ values for LocA LocZ 2000 OC 48 STS 3 or STS 1 end to end path End to End Path Tag Red Line Displays modifies paths in FT 2000 48 8 1 and tag cross connections for Red Line services Alarms Displays the Alarms menu options Alt A Alarms Auto Alarm Polling Changes existing state of Auto Alarm Polling Ctrl A Turns feature off 1f 1t 1s on and vice versa Check mark is displayed if feature 15 on CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Task Mapping 53 Menu Item Keyboard shortcut Alarms Audible Alarm Sets the audible alarm state Check mark is displayed if Ctrl 1 feature is on Alarms Pager Turns the pager feature on or off Checkmark 15 Ctrl P displayed if feature 15 on Alarms Preferences Brings up a dialog box from which to define call Ctrl
36. line 1e O0C48 LPR D 15 MIN 02 12 09 30 line 1e 0C48 LPT D 15 MIN 02 12 090 30 line i1w O0C48 LBCL 1 03 15 MIN 02 12 09 30 line 1w O0C48 LPR D0 15 MIN 02 12 09 30 line 1w O0C48 LPT 0 15 MIN 02 12 09 30 line 1e 0C48 CVL 0 15 MIN 02 12 09 30 line ie O0C48 ESL 0 15 MIN 02 12 09 30 line 1e 0C48 8ESL 0 15 MIN 02 12 09 30 line 1e 0C48 UASL 0 15 MIN 02 12 08 30 line 1e 0C48 PSC 0 15 MIN 02 12 090 30 line 1w 0C48 CVL 0 15 MIN 02 12 09 30 line 1w 0C48 ESL 0 15 MIN 02 12 09 30 AOMEN c All OPT OLS only Purpose To view a report that contains Optical Channel provisioning data for the OLS network element This report is only available from an OLS Network Element View As described in Report Screen Functions earlier in this chapter you can perform a variety of tasks on the Optical Channel Provisioning report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report Procedure 1 From the Report pull down menu select Provision Options and then select A report similar to the following appears 106 The Report Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 B Optical Channels Provisioning Report Ey 2000 Optical Channel Provisioning Report for ETS June 25 1997 14 50 70 01 03 05 56 02 ochan la 1 005 ochan la 2i 005 1 3 208 ochan 1a 41 008 ochan 1a 5 008 MA AS ochan la 5 008 MA
37. oW See SpecCond 630 04 Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table for FiberReach with TL1 continued Ama Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Special Conditions NL set th oc3 Equipped with 28G U only CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix Backup Restore Parameters 345 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for FiberReach with MML Area HL NL Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Special Conditions 2 2 System set ne rtrv ne TID DSNE SITE NE CO RT TBOS Addr TBOS link TBOS Remote Idle Channel Signal AGNE Alarm Group STS uneqpt AIS VT uneqpt AIS lm e Ex Timeout User TLIMSGMAP Message Type Action ___ _ p ote TT ees jx e DCC NS US ee emm eR EE Action Sync set sync RTRV SYNC Mode Switching Syn Source Autoconfiguration pA PA 54 K gt 346 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for FiberReach with MML continued Alarm set attr alm RTRV ATTR ALM Alarm Delay Clear Delay PMN __ eA im type _ Alarm Type Alam 16 RTRV ATTR CONT RT only x x Port amp Line 7 set tl RTRV TI Line
38. x x x 11 0 X x X 5 On GW w CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix F Table of NE releases per CPro releases 383 Table of NE releases per CPro releases continued CPro Release R6 2 DDM OC 12 Crue Su Su IN x X Tal FT SN X 6 0 X X X X X X x X x x ded X X X pa X X X Oud eu Ss 384 e Appendix F Table of NE releases per CPro releases CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Glossary of Terms AID Access Identifier FT 2000 Also applies to Equipment Address DDM 2000 American Standard Code for Information Interchange A standard established by American National Standards Institute ANSI that represents characters numbers punctuation marks or signals and uses seven on off bits plus a parity bit to achieve compatibility among data services ASCII See American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII User Interface The CPro 2000 ASCII user interface provides access to the CIT port of an NE in the same way that an ASCII terminal provides access The user can type commands into the ASCII user interface AUI and receive an immediate response from the NE AUI See ASCII User Interface Baud Rate The number of times per second that the state in a channel 1s switched or reversed during data transmission Each state change may represent two or three bits therefore a baud rate of 30
39. 00 Retrieve Ring Retrieve Map Neighbor Retrieve Map Network RTRV MAP RING Retrieve Map Ring Update SubNetwork Map RTRV PM Retrieve Performance Monitoring Reports PM Data Retrieve Protection rr 1 Retrieve Protection Line Retrieve Protection Low Speed 71 Retrieve Path Trace rr RTRV rr Retrieve rr Provision Port Options Retrieve System po Retrieve PM Thresholds Retrieve Timeslot rr p Retrieve Upper Layer Section p Retrieve User Security _ Set Attribute rr Set Attribute Alarm 7 Set Attribute Control Set Attribute Environment BEEN Set Site ID pu Switch to Protection p Switch to Working SS Update System 2 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix FT 2000 OC 48 TL1 Commands 327 FT 2000 OC 48 User Service Manual Task Oriented Procedures Purpose The purpose of this section 15 to provide a cross reference between the TOP section of Issue 5 of the Lucent Technologies FT 2000 48 User Service Manual and the menu items of CPro 2000 The Cross Reference Table for Tasks Supported in CPro 2000 The following table provides a cross reference between the CPro 2000 capabilities and the FT 2000 OC 48 TOPs Not every step in every one of the identified TOPs may be supported in CPro 2000 The following table only means that significant steps of the TOPs identified in the following table will be helped by the use of CPro 2000 Wherever the TOP calls for use o
40. 133 Enter STS 1 Drop and Continue Cross Connections DDM 2000 3 OC 12 and FiberReach R2 2 equipped with 286 0 OLIU in the mains 135 Enter VT1 5 Drop and Continue Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 only 137 Enter a Range of VT1 5 Drop and Continue Cross Connections DDM 2000 S SII c 138 Enter STS 3 DRI Cross Connections FT 2000 OC 48 only 139 Enter STS 1 DRI Cross Connections FT 2000 OC 48 Release 7 Xonly 141 Enter STS 3 Multi Drop Cross Connections FT 2000 OC 48 only 143 Enter STS 1 Multi Drop Cross Connections 2000 OC 48 Release 7 X 144 Change LocA and LocZ Values for an Existing STS 3 STS 1 Cross Connection FT 2000 48 146 Roll an Existing STS 3 STS 1 Cross Connection to New Source FT 2000 148 Delete a Cross 149 Delete Range of VT1 5 Cross Connections DDM 2000 3 and FiberReach o 150 The Provision Menu 153 B alg 133 Provisioning OC 12 Line Options DDM 2000 OC 12 3 R11 X and FT 2000 mE cT 154 Provisioning OC 1 Line Options DDM 2000 OC 3 R9 X 11 X and FiberReach only 156 Provision
41. 4 To update values use the down arrow list at each text box and choose the appropriate values for each option 5 Click on Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click on Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made Provisioning OPT Channels OLS only Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select OPT Channels The following dialog box displays CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Provision Menu e 163 Line Provisioning Aid Primary State Current Value Set Value Close 2 Choose the AID by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the AID box A list of all the AIDs for the current node is displayed Choose one 3 Once an AID is selected you can click on Get Value to see how the AID is currently provisioned If a line address is chosen that contains the value all then the Get Value button is not available because it applies to more than one set of line provisioning parameters 4 update the value use the down arrow list and select the appropriate value 5 Click on Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click on Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made Provisioning SUPR Channels OLS only Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select SUPR Cha
42. EN 38 EU STEP ini ETE s Enter STS 1 Cross Connections FT 2000 OC 48 Release 7 X only Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click on the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The following screen appears when you release the mouse button CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connections 129 Cross Connection Properties Src AID gt Dest AID sts1 lw 2 2 gt sts1 le 2 2 x Cancel EJ Audit On NOTE When Audit On is chosen an alarm is activated to notify the user of any signal problem See Audit On Option earlier in this chapter 2 130 Cross Connections Click on Cancel if the AIDs shown in the screen are incorrect Select either two way or one way Select Source and Destination TIDs from the down arrow list if available for selection Click on OK and the following screen appears Confirm Cross Connection Enter Enter Oneway From sEz1 1w 2 7 sts1 le 2 2 Source Fi 1 Destination TID 1 Caution Execution of this command may affect service Ces emen Click on Yes if you want to establish the cross connection Click on No if you do not want to establish this cross connection Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation The cross con
43. FiberReach NEs not support X 25 port For OC 3 and OC 12 DCE and DTE ports use MML and the X 25 ports use TL1 CPro supports both of these For FT the DCE and DTE ports can be set to CIT or TLI CPro supports only the TL1 DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 Access via CIT Port For DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 users establishing a connection to your SONET subnetwork for operations with CPro 2000 15 similar to accessing your SONET subnetwork for operations with an ASCII terminal Like an ASCII terminal the COM port of the PC running CPro 2000 can be connected to the craft interface terminal CIT port of a node in your subnetwork CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 CPro 2000 Startup 21 Partitioning 22 CPro 2000 Startup FT 2000 OC 48 Access via CIT Port FT 2000 users must have their CIT port either DCE or DTE provisioned to be a interface to use CPro 2000 Use the FT 2000 PC CIT command security set security port to provision the CIT port as TL I interface Use one of the following methods to provision the port back to a PC CIT non TL 1 port when you have completed your CPro 2000 session Using CPro 2000 select Set CID Secu from the Provision pull down menu and follow the procedure detailed in The Provision Menu chapter of this document From the FT 2000 48 PC CIT use the FT 2000 PC CIT command security set security port to change the port protocol provisioning from TL1 port to CIT port This c
44. Introduction The Alarm Preference option is central to the alarms feature in CPro 2000 The four tabs of the Alarm Preferences dialog box are Alarm e Call List e Providers Pager Test The Alarm Preferences dialog box also provides two buttons OK saves your settings Close dismisses the dialog box without saving your settings The sections that follow describe the functions on each of the tabbed pages in the Alarm Preferences dialog box i The Alarm Tab Use this tab to adjust the repeat interval between alarm sounds change auto alarm polling repeat interval set the communication port for your modem specify a prefix to dial for an outside line and to view or delete the pager log The following sections explain the tasks you can perform from the Alarm Tab of the Alarm Preferences dialog box Alarm Preferences Changing the alarm sounds repeat interval 1 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Change Audible Repeat Seconds to the desired repeat interval from 3 to 30 seconds using the up and down arrows The repeat interval is the number of seconds that pass from the start of one alarm sound to the start of the next alarm sound CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 3 Click OK to save the current settings and dismiss the Alarm Preferences dialog box or Close dismiss the dialog box without saving any setting
45. Only valid slot numbers are displayed Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the Primary Node information you have selected Enter End To End Path Add Drop Node 2 Selected Low Speed 1 Tributary m 1 Primary Mode OC3 3 Selected Low Speed b 1 7 At the bottom of the form you are prompted to select the Secondary Node Double click on the node you have selected The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 241 Choose the Low Speed Slot 8 Select the low speed slot for the Secondary Node Click on OK The main end to end path form displays Enter End To End Path Add Drop Node 3 2 Selected Low Speed b 1 Tributary m 1 Primary Mode OC3 3 Selected Low Speed 1 9 If the information you have selected is correct click on OK to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Enter End To End Path e Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want continue 242 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 10 You may click No if you not want to create the end to end path of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click on Yes The following message box displays 1 End ta End Path may be incomplete if the ring is open Open rings will have cross connects the high speed paren
46. RIGHT BOTTOM are the entries that determine the size of the AUI screen These entries are saved from the last use of the AUI 16 elnstallation CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 SBD shows the amount of time milliseconds for the duration of a Send Break command This parameter appears only if the Send Break default value of 100ms 1s modified via the AUI Edit Menu CPROGUIThis section contains entries that determine the size of the GUI window LEFT TOP WIDTH and HEIGHT are the entries determining the size of the GUI screen and are saved from the last use of the GUI e PREFERENCE This section contains entries that determine how cross connections are viewed in a Network Element View and which communications standard Human Machine Language MML or Transaction Language One TL1 is the default SHOWCC can be either TRUE or FALSE When the entry is FALSE the slots ports containing cross connections are displayed in dark blue and the cross connection lines are not displayed When the entry is TRUE the slots ports containing cross connections are displayed in purple and green of the cross connection lines are displayed as well NE IF DEFAULT can be either MML TL1 depending on which command response type you are using most of the time MML is the current default This variable appears in the tabs at the top of the Login dialog box TIDS TID names only applicable when using TL1 to connect to
47. e The Print function brings up an abbreviated Print menu so that your report can be printed The Save function allows you to save your report to a file name so that it can be accessed at a later time through the Report Viewer command in the View menu e The Close function enables you to close the report without saving it to a file unless you have already done so using the Save function The Settings function offers a full selection of print settings Use the Close Settings command to return to the basic report functions but not to close the report CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Report Menu 91 Path Purpose To view a report that contains information about the complete and or incomplete end to end paths in the partition This command option is only available from the Subnetwork View The Path report only analyzes paths within an individual ring The Partition Inventory command must be completed before creating a Path report As described in Report Screen Functions earlier in this chapter you can perform a variety of tasks on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report NOTE hairpin cross connections will be listed as paths Procedure 1 From the Report pull down menu select Path A report similar to the following appears s Path Report 2000 kl Path Report september 20 1999 16 23 For Partition P 1 This partition contams 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 neterork
48. r list criteria set audible alarm auto alarm polling and modem parameters and test pager setup Alarms Preferences Alarm Controls the frequency or repeat rate of the alarm Tab Audible Repeat Seconds sound R Alarms Preferences Alarm Controls the frequency with which alarm status is Tab Auto Poll Minutes updated P Alarms Preferences Alarm Specifies communication port that corresponds to Tab Modem Comm Port the available modem C Alarms Preferences Alarm Displays the prefix required to dial an outside Tab Alarm Tab To access Outside pager number Line first dial O Alarms Preferences Alarm Displays existing log file Tab View V Alarms Preferences Alarm Deletes the log file Tab Delete D Alarms Preferences Call List Displays the name associated with a specific pager Tab Name number and alarm level N Alarms Preferences Call List Displays the pager number that corresponds to the Tab Phone PIN name specified in the Name field P Alarms Preferences Call List Specifies the pager type Tab Address Type T Alarms Preferences Call List Adds a new entry to the data file Tab Add A Alarms Preferences Call List Modifies the entries in the Call List window Tab Edit E 54 Task Mapping CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Menu Item Keyboard shortcut Alarms Preferences Call List Removes entries from the Call List window Tab Delete D Alarms Preferences Call List Confirms a c
49. sbpsl Iwy 1 3 ALI 5 L D Im EE Port Slot Options 102 The Report Menu Purpose To provide a list of port and or line options for the current node The port slot options report is only available from a Network Element View As described in Report Screen Functions earlier in this chapter you can perform a variety of tasks on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The following port and line options are supported All DSI Ports DDM 2000 3 and FiberReach only All T1 Ports FiberReach only DS3 Ports Not applicable to FiberReach All ECI Ports Not applicable to FiberReach All LS Ports FT 2000 only e All OC 1 Lines DDM 2000 OC 3 R9 11 and FiberReach only e All OC 3 Lines Not applicable to FiberReach e All OC 12 Lines DDM 2000 OC 12 and FT 2000 OC 48 R7 1 and 7 2 only e All OC 48 Lines FT 2000 R7 1 and 7 2 only Procedure 1 From the Report pull down menu select Port Slot Options The Port Slot Options pull down menu displays This menu contains different options depending on the current node s NE type as shown in the list below DDM 2000 3 DSI 053 OC 3 OC 12 DDM 2000 12 DS3 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 FiberReach DS1 TI e FT 2000 OC 48 DS3 OC 3 12 OC 48 LS 2 Select the appropriate port option A report similar
50. slots for example C 1 1 1 to C 2 1 1 C 1 1 1 to C 2 1 2 Inter FN Hairpin Cross Connection address 1 and address 2 are on different function units e pass through in EN Slot Pair Cross Connection address 1 and address 2 are the same NOTE For information regarding necessary equipage and restrictions for entering hairpin cross connections see the Lucent Technologies DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer User Service Manual The following screen shows a graphical representation of the hairpin cross connections described above SNC OC3 D DDM 2000 OC 3 89 1 Enter Single Ox1 VT1 5 Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 9 X and 11 X only Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click on the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection NOTE The following restrictions must be followed to create a single 0x1 cross connection One address in the cross connection must be a main and one address must be low speed slot The low speed slot must contain a 27 type OLIU 19 circuit pack f both service and protection slots are equipped one of them must be provisioned to NMON 2 following screen appears when you release the mouse button Crass Connection Properties From gt 2 4 gt c 2 4 4 3 Click on Cancel if the addresses shown in the screen are incorrect Click
51. 127 roe mial mi 2 DDM 2000 OC 12 R5 0 moz miz a Enter STS 3 Cross Connections 2000 OC 48 only Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click on the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The following screen appears when you release the mouse button Cross Connection Properties Src AID gt Dest AID Iz ba gt sts3 le 3 051 12345678901 23458 Loc 2 Click on Cancel if the AIDs shown in the screen are incorrect Select either two 128 Cross Connections way or one way Select Source and Destination TIDs from the down arrow list if available for selection Click on OK and the following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Confirm Cross Connection Enter Enter From Iz ba sts3 1le 3 Destination DSL 12345678901 23456 Caution Execution of this command may affect service emen 3 Click on Yes if you want to establish the cross connection Click on No if you do not want to establish this cross connection Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 4 cross connection appears the Network Element View as shown in the following sample DSL 123456789012345B 2000 48 6 0 EL 43 43 B EN
52. 2 Enter End T o End Path 4 Hote The Locked Arc Path can contain 2 Locked even number of single Oxls 1 Locked odd number of Single x1s The ring id of Single Ox1 in the service slot must TRIS towards the Locked Mode using ring id versa 2 Near the bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose a locked add drop node Double click on the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot 3 Select the low speed slot for this locked add drop node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen is correct click on OK The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 229 dne Lime 4 Select the time slot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid time slot numbers are displayed Click on OK The following screen appears 5 Select the Ring ID The Ring ID establishes which way the pass through cross connections which are between the locked cross connections should be created It also determines on which side the locked cross connections leave an NE Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected 230 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Enter End To End
53. 4 gt m 2 7 4 NOTE The following restrictions must be followed to create a range of drop and continue cross connections 138 Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 e One address range in the cross connection must be in main and one address range must be in low speed slots 3 Click on Cancel if the addresses shown in the screen are incorrect Click on OK and the following screen appears Confirm Cross Connection Enter Enter Drop Continue From 7 1 Hing Direction m1 Caution Execution of this command may affect service 4 Click on Yes if you want to establish the cross connections individually Click on Yes to All if you want to establish the entire range of cross connections in one step Click on No if you do not want to establish this cross connection Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 5 The cross connection appears on the Network Element View as shown in the following sample 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 R3 1 Enter STS 3 DRI Cross Connections FT 2000 OC 48 only Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click on the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The cross connection must be established in the Add direction In other words the source must be a low speed slot and the destination must be a tributary The following screen app
54. 6 Select the low speed slot for this add drop node Click on OK The main end to end path form displays 216 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Ts CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Enter End T o End Path Swc rT3 Add Drop Node 1 S C FT3 Selected Low Speed Is 1b 1 Tributary sts1 1le 2 2 Add Drop Node 2 1 5 1 If the information you have selected is correct click on OK to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Enter End To End Path Es Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want continue Click on No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click on Yes The following message box displays Enter End To End Path e i i End to End Path may be incomplete if the ring is Open rings will have connects on the high speed or parent ring Click on OK then click Cancel in the End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The screen below shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path The End to End Path Menu 217 CPro 2000 86 2 GUI SVC FT3 5151 FT 2000 48 R7 2 Access Edit View Provision Update Window Conns Alarme Help 2 S C FT3 51751 2000 OC 48 R7 2 Oy x gFLSO1 FT3 5151 FT 2000 OC 46 2
55. 89 185 287 308 MML interface 28 Modem 6 21 26 28 31 44 45 54 291 93 300 303 Modify LocA LocZ 53 285 Mouse conventions 2 392 e Index Multiple document interface MDI 34 43 387 N Network element NE 1 388 Network element view 17 23 29 32 33 35 36 39 43 46 50 53 58 64 65 67 69 71 80 83 84 90 93 98 99 102 104 106 8 111 44 146 149 175 76 284 303 306 8 311 New Subnetwork 25 28 30 31 35 49 57 58 61 Node manager 23 35 41 50 57 65 67 308 O Object Linking and Embedding OLE 388 OC 1 line options 156 OC 12 line options 154 OC 3 line options 157 Open NE 50 57 69 Open Partition 50 57 69 Open Subnetwork 28 30 31 35 49 57 60 Operational Issues 5 303 304 311 313 339 OPT channels 153 163 Optical Channel Provisioning report 106 Optical line interface unit OLIU 37 OSI parameters 172 P Packet assembler disassembler PAD 21 389 Pager 6 7 15 18 36 42 54 55 287 89 291 301 Partition inventory 22 25 28 29 35 36 40 44 50 58 60 92 94 177 185 309 Partition map 23 25 28 29 35 50 58 60 66 Partitioning 5 22 28 34 177 303 309 311 313 339 Password 21 28 30 32 51 58 59 65 71 79 308 316 17 323 325 335 Path Provisioning Errors report 95 Path report 92 303 Paths in Tributary report 96 Physical connections 21 Data report 104 Port Slot Options report 102 Print Window 46 47 50 57 63 Prin
56. Alam 6 RTRV ATTR CONT contype RTony _____ Port amp ent t1 RTRV TI LINECDE HW with override Line NTFCNCDE BPV AIS SFTHR PMMD FMT only 051 PM 350 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 gt gt gt gt gt X X Z E T 2 ud E LI pe gt lt gt lt gt K gt gt gt gt d deae s FN SEM amas a gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table for DDM OC 3 with TL1 continued XBIT DS3 out from BBG20 Area Ord Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions 42 71 72 s0 1 99 91 10 11 NTFCNCDE X X X AIS X X X X X X X SFTHR X X X X X X X X X VMR mode FMT X X X X X X X X X PMMD X X X X X X x X X FRAME X X X X x X X LINECODE X X X X X X x X X PBIT X X X X X X x X X X X Port amp ent t3 RTRV T3 Line Port amp ent ecl RTRV ECI SFTHR Line NTFCNCDE AISALM for BBG20 Port amp ent ocl AISNC Line SFTHR Port amp ent oc3 RTRV OC3 Line Port amp ent oc12 RTRV OC12 Line R
57. Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Type the prefix in the To access an Outside Line first dial field 3 Click OK to save the current settings and dismiss the Alarm Preferences dialog box or Close dismiss the dialog box without saving any settings NOTE Subsequent CPro 2000 sessions open with the last value selected Viewing the Pager Log File The Pager Log File tracks the activities of the pager To view the log file 1 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Select View from the Pager Log File section If no Pager Log File exists the follow message appears The Alarms Menu 293 N Us If a Pager Log File exists a text file similar to the following appears Pager Enabled Thu 14 Oct 1999 88 38 28 Eastern Daylight Time 0400 Message sent CPro 2668 alarm on TID TWENTYCHARACTERSLONG Pager 5 U1234567 notified on Thu 44 Oct 1999 08 31 17 Eastern Daylight Time 6468 bled Thu 1 ct 1999 88 32 22 East Daylight Ti e Pager Enabled Date and time pager feature was enabled If an alarm is detected in the networks while pager is enabled the following information is also displayed Message sent Alarm type and TID Pager number s Pager number called and date and time of alarm notification e Pager Disabled Date and time page
58. Code Alarm Level DLCBPV to LOS AIS Failure Thrshld X x State PM Mode Format NSA AIS Only equipped with Sig Degrade Thres 28G U set vtl RTRV VTI SignalDegradeThres sa AIS nsa AIS X conn RTRV STS1 Primary State fx RTRV TI PrimayStae __ RTRV VTI PrimayStae set crs RTRV CRS X X connection type Ring ID Channel set sts 1 RTRV STSI Signal Degrade Thres Signal Failure sa AIS nsa AIS E SNMP ER CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 347 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for FiberReach with MML continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Special Conditions Perf 19 j setpmthressect RTRV pmthres sect See SpecCond 630 Perf set pmthres line RTRV pmthres line B2 CV OC3 OC3 for 28G U only B2 CV B2 ES B2 ESA B2 ESB B2 SES UAS mE set pmthres sts 1 RTRV pmthres sts 1 See SpecCond 630 m ME set pmthres vt RTRV pmthres See SpecCond 630 VTI Perf set pmthres t1 RTRV pmthres T1 See SpecCond 630 ES L CV P SF CV P ESF ESP SESP UASP CVPFE ESPFE SESPFE UASPFE 348 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 gt lt X Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 3 with TL1 Area Ord Switch RTRV SYS Product ID Switch RTRVOW Orderwiremode Switch
59. Connections is chosen CPro 2000 may take between one to three minutes to display the cross connections in the network element Arrowheads in FT 2000 Cross connections are shown in network element views with a line that has an arrowhead at one end However when there is not enough space to show the arrowhead normally it is turned on its side FT 2000 Overlapping Cross Connections Information not shown in Status Bar If an add cross connection and a drop cross connection have the same source and destination and they also have the same LocA LocZ and with audit on CPro 2000 will show them on the status bar as a single two way cross connection However if the two cross connections have the same source and destination but they do not have the same LocA LocZ and audit then CPro 2000 will show only partial information about each cross connection on the status bar It is recommended for the user to retrieve a cross connection report in the case of overlapping Cross connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Troubleshooting e 307 Dotted Cross Connection Lines not Bold In the Network Element View if the user clicks on a drop and continue cross connection the dotted portion of the cross connection does not turn bold like the solid portion Opening a Large Amount of NE Windows in the GUI May Cause Problems Depending on how the users PC 15 equipped opening a large amount of NE windows in the GUI may cause the PC to run out of me
60. Ctrl A not log you out of an NE or subnetwork Access Login Logs into a remote node in the local node s Ctrl L subnetwork NE View only Access Logout Logs out of the current node NE View Only Ctrl O Access Node Manager Opens closes logs in logs out or switches to each Ctrl Network Element View Can also be used for a partition inventory partition map or renaming a partition Access Run Batch Commands Executes a series of commands using a batch file Ctrl B Access Open Partition Opens the selected partition Subnetwork View only Access Close Partition Closes the selected open partition Subnetwork View only Access Open NE Opens the selected NE Subnetwork View only Access Exit Exits the CPro 2000 application Ctrl X Edit Backup Backs up equipage cross connections and F8 provisionable parameters of the current node to a file Edit Restore Restores equipage cross connections and or F9 provisionable parameters from a file to the current node Edit Change TID Changes the TID of the current NE 50 Task Mapping CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Menu Item Keyboard shortcut Edit Change Password Changes the password of the current NE Edit Switch DRI Operates or releases the manual dual ring interworking DRI switch for an FT 2000 OC 48 Edit Rename Partition View Status Bar Ctrl R Changes the default partition name to a customized name of your cho
61. Digital Signal Level 1 15 an ANSI defined signal or service level at 1 544 Mbps equivalent to T1 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 053 Digital Signal Level 3 1s an ANSI defined signal or service level at 44 736 Mbps equivalent to 28 channels or T3 DTE See Data Terminal Equipment Dual Ring Interworking Dual ring interworking DRI is when two ring networks interconnect at two common nodes EC 1 Electrical Carrier 1 is an STS 1 carried electrically FT 2000 Lucent Technologies SONET OC 48 Lightwave system Gateway Network Element A gateway network element GNE is an NE that provides a means of communication between an OS and remote NEs over the SONET data communications channel DCC GNE See Gateway Network Element Graphical User Interface The CPro 2000 graphical user interface GUI consists of a multiple document interface MDI which can accommodate a SubNetwork Map and several NE Views GUI See Graphical User Interface MML Human machine language defined by Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephone CCITT NE See Network Element CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Glossary of Terms 387 388 Glossary of Terms Network Element A network element NE is a piece of equipment or service that is part of a data communications network Non Preemptible Protection Access A feature which allows the protection tributaries to serve as unprotected se
62. Locked cons in the path then iE nng id with each locked con shall be opposite MU 2 pns You are prompted to choose another node for creating a multi drop path or to create the end to end path When ready to create the path click on OK The following screen appears Enter End T o End Path Es e Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want to continue Click on No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click on Yes The following message box displays Enter End To End Path or parent ring G End to End Path may be incomplete if the ring open Open rings will have cross connects on the high speed Click on then click Cancel in the End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The screen below shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Access Edit Wm Provision Update Window X Conns Alarms Help Three Node Interworking End to End Paths Access Ring Application A form in the CPro 2000 End to End Path menu supports the creation of a three node interworking end to end path which is often used for access ring applications The path is provisioned over an access ring that interconnects to another ring via two colocated pairs of nodes This type of arrangement allows the end to end path to survive multiple failures
63. Ord 16 _ Port amp Line 17 12 rtrv oc12 Kbyte Message Syncmsg Signal Degrade NSA AIS rtrv sts 1 Signal Degrade xconn must exist SA AIS AID must be NSA AIS rtrv crs sts 1 rtrv pmthres sect See SpecCond 630 TxPwrldb TxPwr2db Laser Bias SEFS Qhour SEFS Day rtrv pmthres line See SpecCond 630 B2 OCI2 B2 CV B2 CV ECI B2 ES B2 ESA B2 ESB B2 SES B2 UAS PSC L K Appendix Backup Restore Parameters 367 Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table for DDM OC 12 with MML continued Restore Backup Cmd sped Conditi set pmthres sts 1 RTRV pmthres sts 1 See SpecCond 630 gt Perf 24 set pmthres t3 RTRV pmthres T3 See SpecCond 630 CVL ESL SESL SEFS PCV CV P FMCV CP ESP SESP UAS P SEFSFE Cbit CV PFE ESPFE SESPFE UASPFE Alam 25 Jo PF f o 368 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table for FT 2000 with TL1 6 0
64. Path 4 4 Intwk Locked Node 1 Selected Low Speed c 1 4 Tributary m 1 2 1 Hing ID Note The Locked Arc Path can contain 2 Locked even number of Single Ox1s or 1 Locked odd number of Single 1 The ring id of Single 0 1 in the service slot must point towards the Locked Node using ring id m2 and vice versa 6 Youare prompted to choose the next add drop node Double click on the desired node The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot 7 Select the low speed slot for this add drop node Click on OK The main end to end path form appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 231 232 The End to End Path Menu 8 Enter End T o End Path 4 Locked Add Drop Node 03 1 Selected Low Speed c 1 4 Tributary m 1 2 1 Hing ID Note The Locked Arc Path can contain 2 Locked even number of Single Ox1s or 1 Locked odd number of Single x1s The ring id of Single Ox1 in the service slot must que towards the Locked Node using ring id m2 and vice versa You are prompted to choose another node for creating a multi drop path or to create the end to end path When ready to create the path click on OK The following screen appears Enter End T o End Path 4 e Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want continue 9 Click on No if you do not want to cre
65. Service Manual for further details connect at 9600 baud set to answer flow control off NOTE If you use a modem script to connect to CPro 2000 then you must hang up the modem manually at the end of your CPro 2000 session If you have used the AUI Dial to Connect modem command to connect to CPro 2000 you do not have to hang up the modem manually CPro 2000 recognizes that you have used a modem for connection and automatically hangs up the modem Procedure This procedure describes how to connect to the subnetwork using a modem 1 Make sure that all the communications settings are correct for the type of communications connection being made see the Selecting Communications Options from the GUI section earlier in this chapter 2 Fromthe Communications pull down menu of the AUI select Connect If the menu choice says Disconnect you are already connected 3 modem dials the number and after the other modem at the dialed number has answered you hear the two modems handshake to determine the baud rate at which to communicate with one another If you have successfully accessed the subnetwork the modem should display CONNECT 9600 where 9600 15 the baud rate used for the two modems 4 From the Access menu in the GUI select Open or New Subnetwork The Login dialog box displays immediately if you have selected New Subnetwork If you selected Open Subnetwork choose the appropriate file from which to open this
66. X 7 7 y Port amp 7 set oc3 RTRV OC3 Kbyte Message X X X X X Line Syncmsg X Signal Degrade thr X X X X NSA AIS X Concat Mode Linear MegaStar X X Radio X F 1 7 7 7 7 gt KK gt lt gt lt gt lt gt Line Signal Degrade thr 24G U OLIU NSA AIS o Line Line Line Ee ree meer Line ree mem M ee Line CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 357 Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table for DDM OC 3 with MML continued Area Ord Restore Backup Parameter Conditions 62 74 72 80 81 90 191 110 X conn set crs RTRV CRS X connection type Ring ID X conn 8 enterssts3C or CINE x E uiu x X conn 8 entersvtl popes ff x Channel set vtl RTRV VTI SignalDegrade Thr X SA AIS X X NSA AIS X Channel set sts 1 RTRV STSI Signal Degrade Thr X Signal Failure X X X X SA AIS X X X X NSA AIS X E ___________ Channel 9 set state stsI RTRV state STSI Primary State x x x x FF M dd g
67. ______ 334 334 E XOT pl tior Ipod e qd 335 rata 222 TTE TETTE ______ ___ 336 336 Using Functions and Macros pe gone a 336 COA TORRE COn E __ OPER 221 EE 337 Dite eS 339 Troubleshooting Script and Batch 339 Genera 339 E E 339 Example Data Communications Script 340 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters 341 Backup Restore vau 341 Cross Reference Tables for CPro 2000 Backup Restore Commands 341 Appendix F Table of NE releases per CPro releases 383 Table oE NE releases per C ProweledSeS 383 Glossary of Terms 385 Index 391 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 About This Manual Introduction Welcome to Lucent Technologies CPro 2000 the intelligent common user interface environment that enables concurrent graphics and text based user interaction with members of Lucent Technologies 2000 Synchro
68. a subnetwork For TL1 you must supply a TID The entries in this section are a compilation of the TID names you use during the login process such as or NODE X YZ Each time you type a new TID name into the login screen the TID 15 added to the TID list in your CPRO INI file The latest entry appears at the top of the list Each subsequent time you log in these TID names appear in a down arrow list by the TID field NOTE If you attempt to delete or renumber the TID list in the CPRO INI file ensure that the list 16 kept in sequential order CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 ALARM POLLING This section contains entries that determine whether the automatic alarm polling feature is enabled or disabled and the specified time interval between alarm polling events AUTO identifies whether the alarm polling feature is enabled or disabled When the entry 15 YES the alarm polling feature 1s enabled When this field 15 NO or blank the alarm polling feature 15 disabled and the time interval is reset to three minutes INTERVAL is the amount of time in minutes between automatic alarm polling events The default time interval is three minutes The minimum interval allowed is one minute AUDIBLE ALARM This section contains information about the state of this feature and the alarm sounds associated with specific alarm levels AUDIBLES identifies whether the audible alarm feature is enabled disabled Whe
69. a file via the Backup command See Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters for more details NOTES Only users with a privileged login can restore NE An error message appears if a nonprivileged user attempts this command e Only CPro 2000 R6 0 6 1 and R6 2 backup files can be restored in CPro 2000 WARNING The following commands cause a reset and or result in the loss of DCC connectivity These commands are displayed in a separate Notepad window and must be manually entered in the AUI to complete the restore process DDM 2000 MML DDM 2000 TL1 FT 2000 TL1 eas SS _ ese Instructions for manually entering these commands are included in the section that follows CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Procedure 1 After choosing Restore from the Edit pull down menu the following screen appears _ 7 2 Select the appropriate with which to restore the current NE Click on OK The following screen appears CPro 2000 R amp 2GUI 3 Click on Yes to perform the restore Click on No to cancel the restore 4 If you choose to continue the following screen displays 2000 86 2 GU 5 Click on Yes The following report displays CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Edit Menu 75 Preparation Report for QC3 7 2 2000 OC 3 1 september 20 1999 14 16
70. an error occurs this command raises the WAITFOR FAIL flag Examples WAITFOR DESTINATION Ologin lt 0 lt 0 PAUSE nWaitTime Waits for specified milliseconds where nWaitTime 15 a specified wait time in milliseconds with a maximum of 2 147 483 647 Example PAUSE 1000 DIALCANCEL Disconnects the phone connection established through DIALNUMBER 330 Appendix D Script and Batch Files CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The IF statement allows statements under IF to be included between and On condition false it goes to an ELSE statement or to the next statement condition can be one of the following WAITFOR FAIL DIALNUMBER FAIL or CONNECT FAIL Examples IF WAITFOR FAIL user msg Token not received transmit ee Xp 1f connect fail error msg Unable to connect the COM port exiting exit ELSE This 1s a C like ELSE statement that allows statements under ELSE to be included between and On condition false the execution goes to the ELSE statement Examples IF WAITFOR FAIL user msg Token not received transmite Yr WAITFOR DESTINATION 50 ELSE user msg Logging into the system Cranc E Ue pause 500 if connect fail error msg Unable to connect the COM port exiting exit else user msg Connected to the COM port CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix D Script and Batch Files e 331 USER MSG
71. and STS 1 One way FT 2000 OC 48 only The procedures following this section provide specific instructions on creating the various types of two endpoint end to end paths across a single ring For each type of path one sample is provided Please note that there may be some minor differences from the samples depending on the NE type The Pre TARP NE Release CPro 2000 End to End Cross Connect Table on the next page summarizes which cross connections are supported or unsupported for the different pre TARP NE releases NOTE If the path being configured is a ring with linear extensions the path around the ring and the individual linear extension cross connections are created separately See the following figure for a generic illustration of a two endpoint two way end to end path across a single ring in a subnetwork containing FT 2000 OC 48 NEs 186 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Pre TARP NE Releases CPro 2000 End to End Cross Connect Table Latest 5 STS1 STS3 STS3C Release NN way 4 node 1 way 2 way 2 B IE node Arc po a FiberReach 221 o too 142 X X X XxX x m B2 B4 P 5 cross connect not supported cross connect supported cross connect supported if STS3C Feature is enabled only pass thru VT STS1 STS3C cross connections allowed NK
72. and the following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connections 143 Contirm Cross Connection Enter Enter Oneway From sts3 1le 8 Iz ha Source TID DSL 12345678901 23456 Caution Execution of this command may affect service 5 Click on Yes if you want to establish the multiple cross connections individually Click on Yes to All if you want to establish all the cross connections in the multi drop Click on No if you do not want to establish this cross connection Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 6 The cross connection appears the Network Element View as shown in the following sample 051 1234567890123458 2000 OC 48 R6 0 28825 25825555 es EA NEU EU BER 7 s Enter STS 1 Multi Drop Cross Connections FT 2000 OC 48 Release 7 X only Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click on the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The following screen appears when you release the mouse button 144 CrossConnections GPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connection Properties t Sre AID gt Dest AID sts3 le 6 gt x Cancel Audit On NOTE When Audit On is chosen an alarm i
73. at 1 800 225 4672 for customer assistance and troubleshooting 24 hours a day See your Lucent Technologies account representative for further details This document was produced by Customer Training and Information Products CTIP Contents About This Manual 1 OCC TOPs ee ee gt _ __ _6_______ _ _ di tended AUCH DS ___ ____ NE d Engineering Planners Craft Personnel and Maintenance Personnel 1 Centralized Work Center Personnel ieri retten UR Spe a EE FTU 2 Gua oe E T 8 2 Conveni ONS site ee eee en eee Se nee ne Seen ner tere nee eer eee rere 2 Mouse Geb TE DHT 2 Keyboard 5 3 Introduction 5 The Concept of CPro 2000 P CPro 2000 Customer Assistance 5 6 PAW AEC iusserit M SIR NM RN HM MERERI RI II MU ater 6 vn C ee 6 Supported Network 6 QR A 7 Installation 9 Ta 9 CPro 2000 Installation E 9 Uninstalling 2000 2 15 Customizing 2000 Settings 16 IE E
74. backup may contain e The first line of a backup file contains information about the NE The format is the following internal ID for NE type ring 1 or linear 0 release number of NE at time of backup user ID of user who created file date of file creation as per the NE CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Edit Menu 73 Restore 74 The Edit Menu time of file creation as per the NE A sample first line might look like the following l 1 74 2 NODEJAA ATIOI 174770 2120492 The remainder of the backup file consists of lines containing a Data ID and associated data fields all separated by a comma The following is an example CMD RTRV SECU The number of fields and their values vary depending on the command CAUTION It is strongly recommended that you do not try to access or modify your backup files CPro 2000 cannot support backup files that have been manipulated in any way and subsequently become invalid NOTES e Fora DDM 2000 provisionable parameters can be backed up from one node and restored to a different node as long as the equipage of the nodes and the NE software is compatible Equipage does not affect the restoration of an FT 2000 node The current node must be inventoried during startup or by accessing the Update menu prior to using the Backup command Purpose To restore provisionable options previously saved into
75. based upon the contents of this user manual The on line help consists of the following topics About This Manual Introduction e Installation CPro 2000 Startup e The User Interfaces e Task Mapping e The Access Menu The Edit Menu e The View Menu e The Report Menu e Cross Connections e The Provision Menu e The Update Menu e The Window Menu e The End to End Path Menu e The Alarms Menu e Troubleshooting e The Help Menu The Help Menu also contains About CPro 2000 which provides information about the current release CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Help Menu e 313 2000 Help Purpose To provide an on line version of the User Manual Procedure 1 From the Help pull down menu select CPro 2000 Help A help window displays a sublevel of topics Select the underlined topic for which you need help information NOTE Also included in the help window are standard Microsoft Windows help tools such as File Edit Bookmark Help Contents Search Back and History See your Microsoft Windows documentation for a detailed explanation of these standard features A glossary of terms 15 also available from the help window About CPro 2000 Purpose To see the version number and NE applicability of CPro 2000 Procedure From the Help menu select About CPro 2000 A banner appears containing the title version number and NEs supported in the current release 314 The Help Menu CPro 2000 Us
76. end path 218 5 5 1 Two way end to end path 214 STS 3 1 1 Protected OC 3 cross conections 131 STS 3 cross connections 84 128 STS 3 DRI cross connections 139 STS 3 Multi Drop cross connections 143 STS 3 One way end to end path 209 STS 3 Two way end to end path 205 STS 3C Two way end to end path 200 Subnetwork map 329 Subnetwork view 1 23 25 29 32 33 34 36 39 41 46 47 50 51 53 59 63 67 69 71 80 83 84 89 90 92 93 95 97 175 177 183 185 86 189 205 209 237 264 284 303 308 9 310 Supervisory Channel Provisioning report 107 SUPR channels 153 164 Switch DRI 51 71 80 Synchronous Optical Network SONET 1 System requirements 6 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 T T1 port options 160 Tag Red Line 53 Target identifier TID 24 390 Task map 49 287 313 Technical assistance 5 Tile Horizontal 179 181 Tile Vertical 179 182 Timeslot Usage report 94 interface 22 Toolbar 33 35 36 41 45 46 51 63 66 83 84 113 122 125 27 132 134 140 142 43 145 Troubleshooting 5 303 311 313 339 Two Endpoint end to end path 185 86 U Update Inventory 33 35 67 175 177 309 Update Menu 23 42 74 175 185 313 Update 53 153 54 171 User ID 28 32 58 59 65 73 V Video Service end to end paths 222 Video Sink RT Site STS 3C cross connections 127 Video Source CO Site STS 3C cross connections 125 View Menu 41 45 46 64 83 87 89 91 313
77. expanded partition the Subnetwork View Procedure 1 Inthe Subnetwork View click on the desired partition icon to be closed 2 From the Access pull down menu select Close Partition 3 selected partition is closed and the individual NEs for the partition are no longer displayed Open NE Purpose This command displays the Network Element View for a selected NE Procedure 1 Inthe Subnetwork View click on the box representing the individual NE to be displayed A partition must be expanded to see the individual NEs 2 From the Access pull down menu select Open NE 3 Network Element View 16 displayed for the NE Exit Purpose To exit the CPro 2000 session CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Access Menu 69 Procedure 1 Choose this command when you want to terminate a CPro 2000 session You are prompted to confirm the command with the following dialog box Exit 2000 RB5 2 GUI i This will end your CPro session Cancel 2 If you click on Cancel you returned to where you were previously focused in the GUI and you are not exited from CPro 2000 If you choose OK and you are not in an active CPro 2000 session CPro 2000 closes If you choose OK and you are currently in an active CPro 2000 session the following screen appears 2000 R6 2 GUI 7 Do you wish to save the information Far this subnetwork 3 Choosing No closes any open
78. for instructions on how to print windows from the GUI that are not supported by the Print Window command Printing AUI Screens To print information that appears in the AUI screen use the following procedure Procedure 1 In the AUI from the Capture pull down menu select Standard then select Start 2 The following screen appears Save As Save ir CProR 5 2 Save Capture Files Cancel s 3 Provide a file name as requested 4 Any information displayed in the AUI after Capture Start is chosen is saved to the file until Capture Stop is chosen 5 Inthe AUI select Stop from the Capture pull down menu 6 Access the file created with Notepad or some other Windows word processing package that accepts text as input CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 7 Select Print Setup and choose landscape or portrait depending on the page orientation of the report 8 Select Print and click on OK Printing Windows To print a window that appears in the GUI such as a Network Element View use the following procedure NOTE To print the Subnetwork View see Print Window in the Access Menu chapter Procedure 1 In the GUI click on the window you wish to print 2 Press the Print Screen key on your keyboard to place a copy of the entire screen in the Windows clipboard To place only the selected window in the clipboard press Alt Print Screen 3 Open Microsoft Pai
79. gt Cancel 14 Click Next to proceed with the installation The Select Program Folder dialog box appears Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below Tou type new folder or select one fram the existing Folders list Click Next to continue Program Folders 2000 2 Existing Folders Adaptec Easy CD Creator Adobe Adobe Acrobat AFRICAN AMERICAN ART Compaq Utilities Connectivity Infrared 2000 2000 R8 0 lt Back 15 Read the information in the Select Program Folder box follow the instructions then click Next to continue with setup The Setup Needs The Next Disk dialog box appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Installation 13 Setup Needs The Next Disk Flease insert the next disk Disk 2 IF the files on this disk can be found in another location for example in another drive enter ite Full path click the Browse Button to select its path Browse cea 16 Follow the instructions provided in the Setup Needs The Next Disk dialog box 17 Insert remaining CPro 2000 R 6 2 disks at the prompt then click OK Note that if you selected the Compact or Custom options earlier on in the installation process the system invites you to insert disk 4 after you have inserted disk 2 Disk 3 contains information on the Help files and are not included with the Compact or Custom opt
80. in CPro 2000 script and batch files Functions can be used to do repetitive blocks of commands The following conditions apply to using functions in a CPro 2000 script or batch file e Function definitions should be kept at the very end of a script or batch file following END or EXIT statements e A maximum of ten parameters are permitted in a function Donot use a GOTO statement inside of a function unless it is within a compound statement like IF A GOTO statement cannot be used to go to a label outside the function definition e You can nest other functions calls within a function e TEMP EXIT is called from inside a function it searches for the exit label that appears before the start of the function call not from before its definition e f you use lt or as part of your parameter you must precede them with a backslash Function Syntax A function definition appears as shown below FUNCTION function_name no_of_parameters executable function script lines the parameters are referenced by their order the nth parameter is referenced as n a function does not return any value A function calling appears as shown below CALL function name parameter list each enclosed in two gt s gt Function Example Shown below is an example of how a function can be used in a script or batch file A function can be used in all situations where WAITFOR statement 15 going to be used In this e
81. is not available through the Report pull down menu Procedure 1 Inthe subnetwork view click the right mouse button on the optical link between the desired NEs The Bandwidth Usage option appears NOTE The Bandwidth Usage option is enabled only when the entire ring has been inventoried Otherwise it will appear grayed out and cannot be selected 2 Click on Bandwidth Usage A report similar to the following appears NER ELLE EN DER ONE CPro Usage September 20 1990 dh 17 24 2 ae oVT 1 5 bia CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Report Menu 97 Purpose To display the connectivity in relation to the current node The map report option is only available from a Network Element View As described in Report Screen Functions earlier in this chapter you can perform a variety of tasks on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report Procedure 1 From the Report pull down menu select Map A report similar to the following appears 98 The Report Menu 2000 Report for 003 7 0 2000 OC 3 11 1 21 Septemter zi 98503 17 26 Meb3ghhokr for OQC3 7 Link Zvmbars Connes CUm Froduct Thrsugh Bratus DCI T 3 mini DIR OTI
82. linear NEs directly connected to each other including chains hubs point to point or linear extensions each open ring subtending from other SONET media of higher bandwidth The Partition Inventory Lucent Technologies SONET NEs are designed to possess the intelligence necessary for each NE in the subnetwork to be aware of itself and of the other NEs in the same subnetwork This CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 SONET NE capability which is used by CPro 2000 to derive the Partition Inventory is accomplished simply by querying the NEs CPro 2000 does not require interfaces to OSs that have a network database and it does not require the user to manually create a database CPro 2000 derives its necessary information by querying the NEs and using this data for subnetwork level operations The Partition Inventory is updated for all operations performed from the GUI If your purpose for the current session of CPro 2000 18 to perform subnetwork level tasks such as creating or deleting an end to end path taking an inventory of each partition in the subnetwork 15 essential If on the other hand you need to perform operations on a single node taking a single NE inventory is sufficient see Inventory NE View in The Update Menu chapter for more information If you do not check off Partition Map or Partition Inventory CPro 2000 does the following e logs into the local node e inventories the local node and displays its Network Element V
83. m 1 1 2 m 1 1 3 and so on Tocreate a noncontiguous range of cross connections press the Ctrl key while selecting the cross connection source addresses The source addresses would be sequential but would not include every address between the first address in the range and the last address in the range such as m 1 1 1 m 1 1 3 m 1 2 1 and so on Change LocA LocZ and Roll STS 3 and STS 1 Cross Connections The user also has the ability to change the source of a cross connection without affecting service This is called Change LocA LocZ in CPro 2000 In addition CPro 2000 allows the source of an existing STS 3 or STS 1 cross connection to be moved or rolled to another source without interruption in service NOTE For more information see Change LocA and LocZ Values for an Existing STS 3 or STS 1 Cross Connection and Roll an Existing STS 3 or STS 1 Cross Connection to a New Source in this chapter Audit On Option FT 2000 only As the user creates a cross connection the Cross Connection Properties box appears with the Audit On option When Audit On is chosen the alarm feature which notifies the user of any signal problem is activated To change this setting double click on the cross connection in the NE view to display the Change Loca amp Locz dialog box The feature can be toggled on off by clicking on its box to insert remove the check mark prior to clicking on OK Cross Connection Deletion To delete a cross c
84. menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Click the Providers tab The following window appears Alarm Preferences E4 Call List Providers Alarm Pager Test Service NT Phone B LD b7 3 27 78 Adad Bait Delete NOTES e The Providers tabbed page is read only and cannot be edited The name and telephone number for the pager service provider as shown in the above window e The Add Edit and Delete buttons are grayed out and unavailable in CPro 2000 Release 6 2 Clicking either OK or Close exists the Alarm Preferences dialog box CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Alarms Menu 299 iv Pager Test The Pager Test tab allows you to test your new pager setup Use this tab to send a test message to a new pager setup and to view the results To test a new pager setup 1 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Click the Pager Test tab The following window appears Alarm Preferences 455 5178 This i a 2000 pager test 3 In the Subscriber Pager Number field type the PIN number of the pager to which you would like the test message sent 4 Inthe Message Text section type the test message Note that the test message should not exceed 240 characters 5 Inthe Address Type section select the appropriate pager type Click 1 w
85. modem is being used If the correct modem 15 being used check the following e If you are using local and remote modems to connect verify that the modems connected properly For 2000 make sure the DTE port is set to TL1 e f you are using the AUI to connect verify in the AUI that the settings in Port Settings are correct for your environment Problem An error message Invalid Port Response is displayed and CPro 2000 15 attempting to log in to a FT 2000 OC 48 Action Check to see whether the FT 2000 OC 48 port that is connected to CPro 2000 is provisioned correctly by completing the following steps Execute security set security port to set the port to TL1 from the CIT terminal When you are ready to exit CPro 2000 select Set cid secu from the Provisioning menu to set the port back to CIT Problem CPro 2000 is consistently receiving Invalid Port Response message Action You may want to increase the size of your TIMEOUT parameter in the CPRO INI file The default 15 30000 in milliseconds which equals 30 seconds Note that the maximum allowable setting for the TIMEOUT parameter 1s 90000 milliseconds which equals 90 seconds Operational Issues 304 e Troubleshooting Windows NT has different default directory for Save and Capture For CPro 2000 users running in a Windows NT environment the default capture and save directories are C Windows system32 instead of C ProgramFiles CPr
86. mouse button 3 Cross Connection Properties m From gt 2 7 4 gt 2 4 4 Click on Cancel if the addresses shown in the screen are incorrect Click and the following screen appears Contirm Cross Connection Enter Enter Dual 0X1 From m 2 7 4 2 4 4 Caution Execution of this command may affect service 4 Click on Yes if you want to establish the cross connection Click on No if you 5 do not want to establish this cross connection Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation The cross connection appears on the Network Element View as shown in the following sample SaNC OC3 D DDM 2000 OC 3 R3 1 NOTE dual 1 cross connection is shown with a dashed line to differentiate it from the solid line of a 1 1 two way cross connection CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connections 121 Enter VT1 5 Locked Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 9 X 11 X and FiberReach only Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click on the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination low speed slot of the cross connection The following screen appears when you release the mouse button Cross Connection Properties m From gt To 2 1 gt 1 NOTE The following restrictions must be followed to create a locked cross connection One address in the cross c
87. of Random Access Memory RAM and one available buffered COM port If you are using an external modem you must install a second modem e 3 5 floppy disk drive e hard disk drive with at least 40 MB of available space after Windows is loaded two button mouse sound card to enable Audible Alarm e modem card to enable Alarm Pager monitor NOTE It is recommended that at least a 256 color mode be used 32 MB RAM is recommended for use with large networks Software CPro 2000 Release 6 2 runs on the following platforms Microsoft Windows 95b M Windows 98TM and Windows NT 4 0 NOTE CPro 2000 Release 6 2 does not support Microsoft Windows 3 11 or Microsoft Windows 95a M Supported Network Elements CPro 2000 provides an intelligent common GUI for the Lucent Technologies SONET NEs DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 FiberReach FT 2000 OC 48 OLS and the SONET functionality of SLC 2000 CPro 2000 Release 6 2 provides an interface for the following releases of these network elements DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 6 2 7 1 7 2 8 0 8 1 9 0 9 1 11 0 and 11 1 DDM 2000 OC 12 Release 5 0 5 1 and 5 2 FiberReach Release 2 1 and 2 2 e FT 2000 OC 48 Release 6 0 7 0 7 1 and 7 2 OLS Release 3 0 SLC 2000 the SONET portion if installed with OC 3 MegaStar if based on OC 3 R8 1 or 11 1 NOTE CPro 2000 Release 6 2 supports only the NE releases listed above For more inform
88. of representing numbers with scientific notation is that the 1E part of the notation in the retrieved value field has to be dropped for the entry value field That is for the retrieve command the value returned will has the full scientific notation including 1E However when entering the value with the set or ent commands the MUST be dropped Currenly Cpro is required to observe this convention for the performance management threshold values SpecCond 640 For FT 2000 network elements the command RTRV xx ALL be used to retrieve a variety of parameters These parameters can then be restored with the appropriate modifiers that follows There will not be a corresponding restore command for RTRV xx ALL That is why the restore command column is blank For CPro the use of the RTRV xx ALL command is optional If RTRV xx ALL not used the parameters be retrieved using the RTRV xx modifier commands CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters 381 382 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix F Table of NE releases per CPro releases Table of NE releases per CPro releases CPro Release R6 1 R6 1 2 amp R6 2 FiberReach J X X TD 2 0 2 d X X x X PN x X 3 ORT 3 S j j x 1x x x X X xX X 80 x x x x x 8 1 X x X X 90 x x
89. representing the subnetwork topology of the NEs also known as nodes The Subnetwork View displays any discovered partitions in the subnetwork and the connectivity between them The partition icons can be expanded by clicking on them An expanded partition shows the individual NEs in the partition A Network Element View can be opened by double clicking on the box representing the individual NE in an expanded partition CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The User Interfaces 39 40 The User Interfaces Subnetwork level tasks such as retrieving path reports and bandwidth usage obtaining the Partition Inventory and creating deleting end to end paths can be executed from the Subnetwork View NOTE For details on how to display the Bandwidth Usage report see the chapter titled The Report Menu The Network Element View Each Network Element View window contains a graphical representation of termination points and cross connection provisioning The following list details the Network Element View for each type of NE e The Network Element View for DDM 2000 OC 3 contains termination points for individual STS 1 053 signals or up to 28 5 or DSI signals per STS 1 signal The Network Element View for DDM 2000 OC 3 equipped with 24G U OLIU circuit pack contains termination points for individual STS 3 STS 1 or DS3 signals or up to 28 VT1 5 DSI signals per STS 1 signal The Network Element View for DDM 2000 OC 12 con
90. see how the AID 15 currently provisioned If a line address is chosen that contains the value all then the Get Value button 15 not available because it applies to more than one set of line provisioning parameters 4 To update the value use down arrow list and select the appropriate value 5 Click on Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click on Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Provision Menu e 165 Set FT 2000 48 R7 1 and 7 2 only Purpose To display and or modify the current value for the Protection Access State The NPPA can applied to either direction and will affect the whole ring Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select Set NPPA The following dialog box displays Provisioning Ei Au oe Protection Access State Current Value Set Value Close NOTE If an STS 3 AID is selected the Get Value button is disabled The Get Value button is enabled only when an STS 1 address is selected 2 Choose the AID by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the AID box A list of all the AIDs for the current node is displayed Choose one 3 Once an AID is selected you can click on Get Value to see how the AID 15 currently provisioned If a line address 15 chosen that contains the value all then the
91. so on If you open an AUI session from a settings file then the AUI title bar reflects the name of the settings file The following sample AUI screen shows MML output from a DDM 2000 NE CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The User Interfaces 43 s Edit View Capture Communications Hun Window Help Diss ell m e mE 0C12 CC 83 28 25 45 DDM 2HBH OC 12 HBH5 H 4 rtru map neighbor In progress SNC 0C12 CC 78 83 28 18 25 47 OC 12 R5 8 4 rtru map neighhbor GCOMPLD Map for SNG 06C12 6CC Connected Through Status SNC OC12 CC DDM OC12 5HC 00C12 EE 1 DDM OC12 S5HC 0C12 FF main h 2 DDM OC12 Ready The following sample AUI screen shows TL1 output from an FT 2000 NE Edit View Capture Communications Run Window Help eT Ce ST E 5153 051 123456 789012345 1 111 1828 IP 1828 DSL 123456789H12345A 97 11 11 56 53 1828 COMPLD stsid le 4 sts3 1Lw 4 10AYDRI 23456 78901 23451 LOCZ DS5L 7123456782H12 450 5 ls 8h sts3 1w 4 1UAYDRI LOCA DSL 123456 789 23450 1s 3Ja sts3 1w 5 1UR 202 051 1 23456 789 1 2 3458 5 15 3 2 23 1 5 0 2 051 23456 78901 2 3458 OC3PROT ST STBV stzi3 i1u 5 1s 3a i1UR 051 1 23456 789012 3451 sts3 1u 5 158 3 1989
92. subnetwork The Login dialog box displays NOTE It is important to delete any script file name that appears in the Script field This ensures that CPro 2000 uses any new settings you specified at login CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 CPro 2000 Startup 31 5 Enter your user ID password and for TL1 access the node TID 6 Click on OK After the login process the CPro 2000 GUI window appears containing the appropriate Network Element View or Subnetwork View depending on the view you selected 32 CPro 2000 Startup CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The User Interfaces Overview This chapter contains detailed explanations of CPro 2000 s GUI and AUI The menus color conventions and how to navigate through the user interfaces are fully described The GUI section defines the various components it contains such as the following e toolbar icons Subnetwork View e Network Element View e the status bar and alarm representations Also provided in this chapter 15 a section on how to print reports and windows from the user interfaces Introduction to the User Interfaces CPro 2000 provides both a GUI and an AUI to access Lucent Technologies NEs When CPro 2000 15 started from the CPro 2000 R6 2 program group the GUI forms a relationship with the AUI The AUI receives information from the NE and transfers this information to the GUI The GUI then presents the information to the user in a graphical display The CPro 20
93. the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose locked add drop node Double click on the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot 3 Select the low speed slot for this locked add drop node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen is correct click on OK The following screen appears 234 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 4 Select the time slot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid time slot numbers are displayed Click on OK The following screen appears 5 Select the Ring ID The Ring ID establishes which way the pass through cross connections which are between the locked cross connections should be created It also determines on which side the locked cross connections leave an NE Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 235 236 The End to End Path Menu Enter End To End Path VT1 57TI Locked Arc Locked Add Drop Mode NSL FR C Selected Low Speed c 1 1 Tributary m 1 1 1 Ring ID m Choose next Locked Add Drop Node to create the path Note The Locked Arc Path can contain 1 Locked con or 2 Locked in the p there are 2
94. to End Path FT 2000 OC 48 only Procedure 1 From the Subnetwork View select the End to End Path pull down menu or click on the right mouse button and select End to End from the pop up menu and then select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click on the tabs for STS3 signal rate and AWAY path type CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 205 Enter End To End Path AMAY 3 2 Atthe bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose the first add drop node Double click on the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot 3 Select the low speed slot to be used for this add drop node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen 15 correct click on OK The following screen appears 206 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Choose the Tributary E stz3 le 1 sts3 le 2 stz3 1e 3 sts3 1le 4 zEz3 1e 5 sts3 1e 6 sts3 le stz3 1e 8 sts3 1e 9 sts3 1e 10 stz3 le 11 sts3 1le 12 sts3 le 13 n Fo 1 2a 1 4 4 Select the tributary that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid tributary numbers are displayed Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the infor
95. to provide a cross reference between the Commands and Reports section of Issue 5 of the Lucent Technologies FT 2000 OC 48 User Service Manual and the menu items of CPro 2000 The Cross Reference Table 2000 OC 48 TL1 commands reports that do not have an entry in the CPro 2000 Menu column are not supported in CPro 2000 However please keep in mind that since CPro 2000 allows concurrent access to both GUI and AUI you can always enter the TL1 commands that are not supported on the CPro 2000 menus from the AUI window TL1 Command Description CPro 2000 Menu Item ACT USER Activate User Access Login ALW MSG_ JjAlowMesag Cid CPY PRGM o DLT CRS STS3 Delete Cross Connection STS 3 X Conn Network Element Delete DLT TADRMAP Delete TID Address Map DLT USER SECU Delete User Security DID ED DAT Edit Date __ ED PID Edit Password Edit Change Password ED USER SECU Edit User Security CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix C FT 2000 OC 48 TL1 Commands 325 TL1 Command Description CPro 2000 Menu Item ENT CRS STS3 Enter Cross Connection STS 3 X Conn Network Element Enter ENT PROT r ENT PROTN LINE Enter ProtectionLine ENT PROTNIS Enter Protection Low Speed ENT ROLL STS3 Enter Roll STS 3 Enter e ENT STSI Enter STS 1 Provision Port Options ENT SYS Enter System Edit Change TID Provision Set N EN
96. to the following appears gt Report 2000 DES Report for 0C3 7 IDDE SBHB Gees R11 1 2 September 20 1999 18 17 54 OC 3 Line Provisioning Report Line Signal Degrade Optical Sync Address Threshold Power hw Message Alarm main 1 Ebyte NA main Z Ebyte NA gt 2 Ebyte NA ur 4 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Report Menu 103 Data DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 and FT 2000 OC 48 R6 0 only Purpose To provide a performance monitoring PM report for the current node The PM data report option is available from a Network Element View only As described in Report Screen Functions earlier in this chapter you can perform a variety of tasks on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report The following options are available for a PM Data report depending on the NE type DS1 Ports DDM 2000 OC 3 053 Ports STSI Channels VTI Channels DDM 2000 OC 3 Ports OC 1 Lines DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 9 0 OC 3 Lines OC 12 Lines OC 48 Lines FT 2000 OC 48 only Procedure 104 The Report Menu 1 From Report pull down menu select PM Data The PM Data pull down menu contains some of the following options depending on the NE type DSI Ports DS3 Ports STSI Channels VT1 5 Channels ECI Ports OC 3 Lines OC 12 Lines and 48 Lines Select the appropriate option If you are connected to CPro 2
97. user 15 working in the GUI and the focus is in the Network Element View the Window menu lists available windows open Network Element Views Subnetwork View as well as the defaults Cascade Tile Horizontal Tile Vertical and Arrange Icons Sometimes if the focus is in the Subnetwork View the Window menu may only list the default window variations Immovable Window after Maximize Occasionally when a FT 2000 15 maximized it will drop down to the bottom third of the GUI window display The user will be unable to reposition the window at this point however this will not impact CPro 2000 functionality To recover from this situation the user should reposition all the windows by choosing CASCADE or TILE options under the Window menu SLC NE s Identified as OC 3s in Reports In mixed subnetwork of SLC 2000 DDM 2000 the reports will list the 51 2000 network elements as DDM 2000 OC 3 network elements CPro 2000 Customer Assistance Customer assistance and troubleshooting are now available from Lucent Technologies Customer Technical Support Organization CPro 2000 CTS is available by calling 1 800 225 4672 a toll free hotline number The hotline 15 staffed with technical representatives and 15 operational 24 hours a day seven days a week CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Troubleshooting 9 311 312 Troubleshooting CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Help Menu Overview The Help Menu contains on line help topics
98. with MML continued Area Ord Restore Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions 42 TI 72 s0 s1 90 91 u0 11 Comm ent ulsdcc RTRV ULSDCC X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X memes DCC NS US m o LLL Sync set sync RTRV SYNC mode switching Syn Src Syn Auto Reconfig omd BBE2B line timed and src set to fn c aisthres BBF2B line timed sync out Switch 5 RTRV SYNC Alarm set attr alm RTRV ATTR ALM Alarm Delay Clear Delay PMN Alarm set attr env RTRV ATTR ENV RT only X X x x x X X x x X X E Alam 6 f setattr cont _ RTRV ATTR CONT RT only Port amp set t1 RTRV TI Line Coding Line Alarm Level DLC BPV toLOS AIS Failure Threshold PM Mode only in PM pack Format only in PM pack 356 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 i anon EE rtt p ll d dd a aud fre oW Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table for DDM OC 3 with MML continued Restore Backup Parameter Conditions 62 71 72 80 84 90 91 110 X X X Port amp set t3 RTRV T3 Alarm Level X Line AIS Failure Threshold Mode Format PM mode Frame XBIT DS3 out from BBG20 AISALM for BBG20 Ord dm p je QU 000 Pd Line signal Degrade X X X X X X X imeem hix Line Signal Degrade Thr
99. 0 You may click No if you do not want to create the end to end path of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click on Yes The following message box displays 1 End ta End Path may be incomplete if the ring is open Open rings will have cross connects the high speed parent ring 11 Click OK then click Cancel in End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The screen below shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path 2000 6 2 0012 2 DDM 2000 OC 12 85 1 2 aa SRE Ane Help JE CCI 2 3 DOM 2000 06 12 R35 12 O x 12 1 DBH 2000 C 12 H5 1 2 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 253 Enter an STS 3 One way Three Node Interworking End to End Path FT 2000 OC 48 only Procedure 1 p 254 e The End to End Path Menu From the End to End Path menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click on the tabs for STS3 signal rate and IWAY 3 Node Intwk path type Enter End To End Path AMAY 3 Made Inbwk 453 C4 23 At the bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose the secondary node Double click on the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears Choose the Low Spe
100. 0 NE This happens because CPro 2000 enters assignments for both members of OC3 OC12 1 1 pair and the NE denies the second enter assignment No user action 15 required The assignment has been set correctly SROF during FT 2000 Restore For FT 2000 restore certain TL1 provisioning commands may cause circuit pack resets If the OHCTL resets some TL1 commands sent while the OHCTL 15 resetting may be denied as CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Troubleshooting 305 SROF Status Requested Operation Failed The commands that were denied will be reported in the Restore Report at the end of the Restore To complete these commands repeat the Restore after allowing time for the OHCTL reset to complete CPro 2000 will not repeat the commands that were completed successfully during the first Restore At the start of Restore CPro 2000 does a new backup creating a temporary backup file Then it compares this temporary backup file to the backup file being restored It restores only those parameters that are different Restore Exits Can t Delete Cross Connections At the start of Restore CPro 2000 deletes all existing cross connections During Restore the cross connections from the Backup file are entered If CPro 2000 18 unable to delete all the existing cross connections at the beginning of Restore CPro 2000 will exit from the Restore For FT 2000 it may be because of 1 1 protected pair In the case of the 1 1 protected pair C
101. 0 may equal 900 bits per second Channel A transmission path or link CIT See Craft Interface Terminal CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Glossary of Terms 385 386 Glossary of Terms Craft Interface Terminal The user interface terminal that 15 part of an NE and 15 used by craft personnel to operate the NE DACS 111 2000 The Lucent Technologies digital access and cross connect system that provides clear channel switching at either the 053 or the STS 1 rates DACS IV 2000 The Lucent Technologies digital access carrier and cross connect system that provides electronic DS3 STS 1 or DS1 VT1 5 cross connect capability Data Communications Equipment Data communications equipment DCE 15 the functional equipment that establishes maintains and ends a connection the signal conversion and the coding required for communications with a data circuit Data Terminal Equipment Data terminal equipment DTE includes control logic buffer store and one or more input output devices for example terminals printers or computers Datakit VCS Lucent Technologies data switch with low delay that provides high speed data communication between different networks and various computer equipment DCE See Data Communications Equipment DDM 2000 A Lucent Technologies network multiplexer that multiplexes DS1 DS3 or STS 1 inputs into STS 1 OC 3 or OC 12 outputs DRI See Dual Ring Interworking DS1
102. 00 Group 3 shelf OC 3 R9 0 network element with CPro 2000 and wishes to access a subtending FiberReach shelf the OC 3 R9 0 Group 3 shelf must be equipped with the new 5 circuit pack If the user is connecting to DDM 2000 OC 3 Group 4 shelf the BBF5 pack 15 not required Cursor becomes hourglass when positioned outside of a confirmation box If the cursor is moved outside a confirmation box while CPro 2000 is waiting for the user to make a choice such as Yes No or OK the cursor will become an hourglass If the cursor 15 moved back into the confirmation box it will once again become an arrow indicating to the user that CPro 2000 15 awaiting a response from the user Invalid Subnetwork Configurations Not Supported The user should be aware that invalid or currently unsupported subnetwork configurations would cause problems with the subnetwork view and end to end capabilities of CPro 2000 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Release 6 1 It is best to avoid using CPro 2000 on subnetworks which do not comply with the current Lucent Technologies network element supported configurations Invalid Equipage Network Configuration in DDM 2000 Causes Denials from CPro 2000 CPro 2000 obtains its information about how a network element 15 equipped from the RTRV EQPT report If the network element equipage is changed the user must run update on the network element and re inventory the NE in CPro 2000 Window Menu Inconsistencies If the
103. 00 GUI allows users to execute tasks on the subnetwork or on specific NEs in the subnetwork by selecting commands from the menus and objects from the graphical display Tasks that may normally require typing several long ASCII interface commands can be accomplished with a few mouse clicks in the GUI The AUI can be used for commands that are unsupported by the GUI Although the AUI may be used to talk directly to the subnetwork by typing commands this should be done carefully Changes made to the subnetwork via the AUI are not reflected in the GUI unless a CPro 2000 Update Inventory command is performed Your GUI and AUI may become unsynchronized or the data in your subnetwork may become inconsistent with the data in CPro 2000 See Using the Interfaces Together in this chapter for more information on keeping the user interfaces synchronized and consistent CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The User Interfaces 33 Using the Interfaces Together The GUI and AUI work together in CPro 2000 Both are necessary for successful operation of the system The AUI accepts commands from the GUI and forwards them to the NE The AUI then accepts the response from the NE and passes that information onto the GUI for storage or presentation Communication with the subnetwork 15 the backbone of CPro 2000 Once communication 15 established with the local node CPro 2000 is able to communicate with the other NEs in the subnetwork of the information that CP
104. 00 OC 12 SHC DC12 G66 ha gt 1 Current Value A screen similar to the following appears for FiberReach A screen similar to the following appears for FT 2000 servas CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 screen similar to the following appears for OLS EUR vois pias LX HU SOLITUDEZ Alarm Group Alarm GNE Cunent Value Le Directory Services HE Cunent Value 25 Packet Size Cunent Value Optical Direction Cunent Value Power Shutdown Curent Value 4 Standard Value System Cuncnt Valuc Side System Curent Value 2 the screen that appears for your NE type click on Get Values to display how the node 15 currently configured 3 Using the down arrow lists select the options appropriate for the node you are configuring CAUTION Changing the values of certain parameters using Set NE will cause the NE to reset This will temporarily halt the communication between CPro 2000 and the NE CPro will display a message box describing the situation When the reset is over click OK in the dialog box CPro 2000 will then try to establish communication with the NE If you are logged off the node try to reconnect to the node through the AUI See the appropriate User Service Manual for procedures on changing an FT 2000 OC 48 NE to or from a DSNE or a DDM 2
105. 00 installation diskettes into the 3 5 inch drive 4 Click on the Start button on the taskbar then click Run The Run dialog box appears Hun Ei Es Type the name of a program folder or document and J Windows will open it for vau Oper setup Cancel Browse 5 x setup in the command line box of the Run dialog box where x 1s the drive letter for your floppy drive For example enter a setup if your floppy drive is designated as drive a 6 Click OK The Setup dialog box appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Installation 9 10 elnstallation CPro 2000 2 Setup is preparing the Installs Wizard which will quide you through the rest of the setup process Please wall 100 7 Read the text in the Setup dialog box and wait for the window to close Welcome window appears Welcome ta the CPro 2000 A6 2 Setup program This program will install CPro 2000 Ab 2 an your computer It i strongly recommended that exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs have running Click Next ta continue with the Setup program WARNING This program 1 protected by copyright law and International treaties Unauthorized reproduction distribution of this program any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and Will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under l
106. 000 to or from an AGNE and the implications that arise from this operation 4 Click on Set Value to activate the new network element options You can click on Close at any time to end the session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value your changes will not be saved CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Provision Menu 169 Set Feat DDM 2000 only Purpose To display and or modify the current settings for OC 3 3 DSIPM and OC 12 STS 3C parameters Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select Set Feat The following dialog box displays for OC 3 SET FEAT FOR OCS Port Provisioning DSIPH Current Value Set Value Close The following dialog box displays for OC 12 STS3C SET FEAT FOR 12 Port Provisioning X Set Value Close 2 Click on Get Value to see the current settings 3 To update the value use the down arrow list and select the appropriate value 4 Click on Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click on Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made set CID Secu FT 2000 OC 48 R7 2 and OLS only Purpose To display and or modify the settings for the current port or to change the DTE port Also to change the protocol back to CIT CAUTION IMPROPER SETTING OF THIS PARAMETER WILL INTERRUPT COMMUNICATIONS Procedure 1 From the Pro
107. 000 using MML in this case a DDM 2000 OC 12 a screen similar to the following appears If you are using TL1 to connect to CPro 2000 go to Step 4 DDM 2000 OC 12 PM OC 12 Lines Signal Address Display Using the down arrow list select a signal address on which to run the report Click on Display when the signal address option is correct A report similar to the following appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 PM Report for SHC OCIZ EE February 12 1997 16 24 4 Line Performance Monitoring Status Report Last initialized day registers at 70 03 28 23 45 41 quarter hour registers at 70 03 25 23 45 41 B2 CV ES ES ES SES Type B View Pace of 4 If you are connected to CPro 2000 using in this case FT 2000 OC 48 a screen similar to the following appears FI 2000 0 48 OC 46 Lines 1 DAY 15 MIN Time Period Enter 15 Period Hour Display 5 Select the time period you want the report to cover 1 DAY or 15 MIN If you select 15 MIN you then need to enter the 15 MIN period as shown in the previous screen Click on Display and a report similar to the following displays CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Report Menu e 105 CPro 24O000 PM Report for DSL 1l234567e90123458B February 12 1997 15 39 DSL 123456799012345B 97 02 12 17 30 43 line 1e 0C48 LBCL 1 00 15 MIN 02 12 09 30
108. 1 EST eei _ Threshold ESE tena ee Threshold T3 _ Threshold VT1 5 RTRV SECU JRetiveSecuity Cid Cd RTRV STATE RTRV STATE EQPT Retrieve State Equipment RTRV STATE PATH_ Retrieve State Path O Z _____ RTRV STATE STS 7 Retrieve 5 Retrieve State VT1 5 RTRVSTS ____ _ 5 ____________ Retrieve Synchronization RTRV ULSDCC Retrieve Upper Layer Section DCC RTRV VTI Retrieve VT1 5 O o o ooo 5 Set Attribute Alam CE ________ Set Attribute Control o Set Attribute Environment SET DATE SET FEAT JSetFetue SetFarEndCommunicaios SET LGN J SelLlogin SET LINK SET NE Set Network Element Provision Set NE SET OC3 Set OC 3 Provision OC 3 SET PASSWD po SET PMTHRES LINE Set Performance Monitoring Threshold e dae e SET PMTHRES SECT Set Performance Monitoring Threshold SET PMTHRES STSI Set Performance Monitoring Threshold SIS RR Hl NNI MEN T1 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix DDM 2000 OC 3 Commands 317 CIT Command Description CPro 2000 Menu Item SET PMTHRES T3 Set Performance Monitoring Threshold T3 SET PMTHRES VTI Set Performance Monitoring Threshold VTI 5 SET STATE ECI 5845
109. 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual for complete details The OC 3 Lines application parameter in the Provision menu must be set to video 2 Click on Cancel if the addresses shown in the screen are incorrect Select the Video Source cross connection icon left icon from the Cross Connections Properties toolbar 3 Click on OK and the following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connections 125 Contirm Cross Connection Enter Enter Video Source From Caution Execution of this command may affect service 4 Click on Yes if you want to establish the cross connection Click on No if you do not want to establish this cross connection Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 5 The cross connection appears on the Network Element View as shown in the following sample SNC OCT2 EE DDM 2000 OC 12 65 0 1 0 2 11 rae 4 n Enter Video Sink RTV STS 3C Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 12 only Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click on the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The following screen appears when you release the mouse button NOTE When choosing the source and destination slots of the cross connection be sure to use the STS 3 slots that is click on and drag to the large
110. 3 Enter Single STS 1 Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 9 129 m E 114 Enter Dual STS 1 Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 9 X 11 ARO CKA NC 116 Enter 1 5 Cross Connections DDM 2000 3 and FiberReach only 117 Enter Single VT1 5 Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 9 X and IRE doi 119 Enter Dual VT1 5 Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 9 X and IBS 40 c c 120 Enter VT1 5 Locked Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 9 X 11 X and BIberRedcboOBlby sscesosmusod __________ 122 Enter a Range of VT1 5 Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach T T H 123 Enter Video Source COV STS 3C Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 12 122 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Contents iii iv Contents Enter Video Sink RTV STS 3C Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 12 only 126 Enter STS 3 Cross Connections FT 2000 48 2 221 128 Enter STS 1 Cross Connections FT 2000 OC 48 Release 7 X only 129 Enter STS 3 1 1 Protected OC 3 Cross Connections 2000 48 only 131 Enter STS 1 1 1 Protected OC 3 Cross Connections FT 2000 OC 48 PON
111. 3 and FiberReach only Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click on the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The following screen appears when you release the mouse button Cross Connection Properties From gt m 1 7 3 gt m2 1 7 3 2 Click on Cancel if the addresses shown in the screen are incorrect Click on and the following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connections 117 Confirm Cross Connection Enter Enter Twoway From 1 7 3 1 7 3 Caution Execution of this command may affect service Cen 3 Click on Yes if you want to establish the cross connection Click on No if you do not want to establish this cross connection Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 4 The cross connection appears the Network Element View as shown in the sample below SNC 0OC3 C DDM 2000 0C 3 R3 1 NOTE CPro 2000 supports hairpin cross connections for DDM 2000 OC 3 NEs where both the source and the destination of the cross connection are in low speed slots Hairpin cross connections are entered using the same procedure as VT1 5 two way cross connections Types of hairpin cross connections that are now supported by CPro 2000 include Intra Slot Hairpin Cross Connection between any addresses except different
112. 4 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Close Subnetwork 50 57 61 Close Window 50 57 64 CMS Port Provisioning report 108 CMS ports 153 165 Color conventions 33 35 42 303 COM port 6 19 21 27 62 303 330 31 333 Communications Menu 27 29 44 45 Connect Preferences 25 27 30 31 CPRO INI 12 16 19 29 288 290 304 5 CPro 2000 installation 9 29 CPro 2000 program group 388 Cross connection creation 111 Cross connection deletion 36 112 149 151 Cross Connections 5 303 311 313 339 Cross Connections report 93 Customer assistance 5 311 D Data communications channel DCC 21 52 387 Data communications script 16 28 30 337 340 Datakit 386 DDM 2000 OC 12 6 38 40 84 103 4 111 114 116 125 27 153 54 157 162 168 185 86 188 89 196 200 222 23 248 49 264 288 307 321 324 DDM 2000 OC 3 6 21 22 24 37 40 84 94 103 4 111 14 116 20 122 23 135 38 150 153 156 57 159 162 167 185 86 188 89 196 223 227 28 237 244 264 272 288 305 307 310 315 318 19 379 DEFAULT SCR file 12 18 19 338 Delete a range of VT 1 5 cross connections 150 Delete end to end path 284 Discovered partition 58 DS port options 159 DS3 port options 161 Dual 0X1 STS 1 cross connections 116 Dual 0X1 5 cross connections 120 Dual ring interworking DRI 71 80 320 E port options 162 Edit Menu 17 18 24 41 45 59 71 77 153 313 341 End to End Cross Co
113. 4 Select the tributary that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid tributary numbers are displayed Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected Enter End To End Path gt 3 Made Inbwk AMAY 3 Made Inbwk 4 Hode Intwk Secondary Node Ring 48 1 Selected Low Speed Is 4a Tributary sts3 1e 8 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 279 5 You are prompted to choose the primary node for Ring A Double click on the desired node The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot 6 Select the low speed slot for the primary node in Ring A Click on OK The main end to end path form appears Enter End To End Path 3 Made Secondary Node Ring 0C48 1 Selected Low Speed Is 4a Tributary sts3 1e 8 Primary Mode Ring 4 2 Selected Low Speed Is 2b 280 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 7 You are prompted to choose the Primary Node for Ring B Double click on the desired node The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot 8 Select the low speed slot for the Primary Node in Ring B Click on OK The main end to end path form appears Enter End To End Path 3 Made Inbwk Secondary Node Ring 0C48 1 Selected Low Speed Is 4a Tributary sts3 1e 8 Primary Mode Ring 2 Se
114. 5 cross connections 40 84 112 117 119 120 123 150 307 VTI 5 Drop and Continue cross connections 137 38 5 Locked cross connections 122 VT1 5 T1 Locked end to end path 233 VTI 5 T1 Two way end to end path 193 W Window Menu 42 179 311 313 Window toggle 184 Work center personnel 2 X X 25 port 1 21 22 30 31 390 X Conns Menu 42 49 111 Index e 393 394 e Index CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2
115. AS Qe6han 1a 7 0023 MA AS All SUPR OLS only Purpose To view a report that contains Supervisory Channel provisioning data for the OLS network element This report is only available from an OLS Network Element View As described in Report Screen Functions earlier in this chapter you can perform a variety of tasks on the Supervisory Channel Provisioning report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report Procedure 1 From the Report pull down menu select Provision Options and then select All SUPR A report similar to the following appears supervisory Channels Provisioning Report CPro zDm Supervisory Channel Provisioning Report for ETZ June 25 1997 d 14 37 2 70 01 03 05 43 24 supr 1a LEVEL OC3 NTFCNCDE CE SDTHE 35 supr Za LEVEL OC3 NTFCNCDE MN SDTHRE 6 amp supr 3a LEVEL OC3 NTFCNCDE CE SDTHRE 6 amp supre da LEVEL OC3 NTFCNCDE MN SDTHR 5 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Report Menu 107 CMS OLS only Purpose To view a report that contains Customer Maintenance Signal CMS port provisioning data for the OLS network element This report is only available from an OLS Network Element View As described in Report Screen Functions earlier in this chapter you can perform a variety of tasks on the CMS Port Provisioning report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report Procedure 1 From the Repo
116. Click on Cancel if you do not want to delete anything NOTE When overlapping multiple cross connections exist the following screens appear during the deletion process Proceed with Caution You have selected more overlapped cross connections to be deleted Use utmost caution before selecting YES TO ALL 6 Click on OK Confirm Cross Connection Delete Delete Oneway From Is 2a sts3 1w 2 Destination SHC FT D2 Caution Execution of this command may affect service 1 7 Click on Yes to delete only the selected cross connection Click on Yes to All to delete all overlapping multiple cross connections and the following screen appears Warming Please Confirm Your Action You have selected multiple Cross Connections to be deleted Are you sure you want to delete ALL of them Select No to reconsider deleting all Cross Connections 8 Click on Yes to delete all overlapping multiple cross connections Delete a Range of VT1 5 Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach only Procedure 1 Select the source range by clicking on the first cross connection line in the range and then while holding down the Shift key click on the end cross connection line of the range 2 Press Delete key or drag the cross connection lines to the trashcan icon located in the bottom right hand corner of the GUI 150 Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Releas
117. Conditions 62 71 72 89 84 90 91 11 0 Perf set th t See SpecCond 630 QH ESL NEND QH CVP NEND QH ESP NEND QH SESP NEND QH UASP NEND QH CVP FEND QH ESP FEND QH SESP FEND UASP FEND 0 354 e Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 3 with MML Area Ord Restore Backup Parameter Special Conditions 62 71 72 80 84 90 91 110 Eu I ia Swth o Jrrvow jOrdrwremode o o _ Swin Ilis System set ne RTRV ne X X X X SSH X X X X X GNE Site X X X X X X NE X X X X X X CO RT X X X X X X TBOS Addr X X X X X X TBOS Link X X X X X X TBOS Remote X X X X X X Idle Channel SIgnal X x x x x X AGNE X X X X x X X Alarm Group X X X X X X STS Uneq AIS VT Uneq AIS cross connect mode DCC mode X Shelf PKT size Timeout Pp ume fd E User Type H Comm ent tllmsgmap RTRV acid TLIMSGMAP msgtype Action 1 IL SNPA Address ACID gt gt CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 355 Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table for DDM OC 3
118. DENEN Switch x 25 must be plug in Site NE co rt selector tbos display addr tbos backup link tbrem TID DSNE GNE Site NE co rt selector tbos display addr tbos backup link tbrem idle agne almgrp STS unequip AIS VT unequip AIS cross connect mode DCC mode Shelf X 25 packet size a B ent sys RTRV SYS System 1 System 2 System 2 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 RTRV SYS GNE tmout uap 2 6 2 7 1 7 X X X X gt lt gt lt ree X X X X X X X X X K K K gt lt T ud pee p UD Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters 349 Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table for DDM 3 with TL1 continued LH T ER pe pe an ent tlImsgmap RTRV 5 TLIMSGMAP ms 5 ent osacmap RTRV OSACMAP VC SNPA ACID ald ud _ pm 12 Sync ent syncn RTRV SYNCN syncnmode syncfunction AISthres MDSW src main2 Switch 5 7 RTRV SYNCN ____ provisioned mode Alarm ent attr alm RTRV ATTR ALM almdel pmn Alarm ent attr env RTRV ATTR ENV ntfcnde RT only X almmsg X almtype
119. Ds for the current node 15 displayed Choose one 3 Oncealine address is selected you can click on Get Value to see how the line is currently provisioned If a line address is chosen that contains the value all then the Get Value button 15 not available because it applies to more than one set of line provisioning parameters 4 update the values use the down arrow list at each text box and select the appropriate values for each parameter 5 Click on Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click on Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made Provisioning DS1 Port Options DDM 2000 OC 3 only Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select DS1 Ports The following dialog box displays 051 Port Provisioning Port Address i Line Coding Alarm Level Current Value AIS Current Value Failure Threshold Current Value to LOS Current Value State Current Value PH Hode Current Format Current V alue Set Value Close 2 Choose a port address by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the port address box A list of all 051 port addresses for the current node 1s displayed Choose one CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Provision Menu e 159 Once port address is chosen click on Get Value to see how the port is currently provisioned If a port address 15 chos
120. End T o End Path 2 Atthe bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose the primary node for Ring A Double click on the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot 3 Select the low speed slot for the primary node for Ring A Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen 15 correct click on OK The following screen appears 266 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Choose the Timeslot 4 Select the timeslot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid timeslot numbers are displayed Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected Enter End To End Path 4 Hode Intwk Primary Mode Hing OC3 1 Selected Low Speed 1 Tributary m 2 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 267 5 You prompted to choose the secondary node in Ring A Double click on the desired node The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot 6 Select the low speed slot for the secondary node in Ring A Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected Enter End To End Path Twaoway Hing Transpoart 3 Made 4 Node Intwk Primary Mode Hing OC3 1 Selecte
121. End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Choose the Low Speed Slot 6 Select the low speed slot for the Primary Node from the scroll list Only valid slot numbers are displayed Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the Primary Node information you have selected Enter End To End Path 3 Node Intwk im mb l mbz mb 1 yk dd 12 12 3 me mb l mbz Add Drop Node 012 27 Selected Low 5peed c Tributary Primary 0C12 1 Selected Low 5peed c 7 At bottom of the form you are prompted to select the Secondary Node Double click on the node you have selected The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 251 Choose the Low Speed Slot 8 Select the low speed slot for the Secondary Node Click on OK The main end to end path form displays Enter End To End Path 12 mb l mbz mb1 mnbz REN 12 280 12 3 me 1 gt mb Add Drop Node OC1 2 2 Selected Low 5peed Tributary Primary 12 1 Selected Low Speed 9 If the information you have selected is correct click on OK to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Enter End T o End Path Es e Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want continue 252 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 1
122. GUI windows closes the AUI window and terminates CPro 2000 If you choose Yes your subnetwork information is saved the GUI and AUI close and CPro 2000 is terminated 70 The Access Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Edit Menu Overview Backup The Edit Menu contains commands that backup and restore information about NEs change target identifiers TIDs and passwords and execute the dual ring interworking DRI switch for FT 2000 OC 48 The following commands are available from a Network Element View Backup e Restore Change TID Change Password Switch DRI FT 2000 48 only The following command is available from a Subnetwork View e Rename Partition Purpose Creates a backup copy of the current equipage cross connections and provisionable parameters of a node to a file Files created during a backup are used during the Restore command See Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters for more details NOTE Only CPro 2000 R6 0 R6 1 and R6 2 backup files can be restored in CPro 2000 R6 2 Procedure 1 After choosing Backup from the Edit pull down menu the following screen displays CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Edit Menu 71 File name Folders EX progra 1 Z3 2 Cancel Hetwork Save file as type Drives Backup Files 2 Specify a file name to which you want the backup data to be sav
123. Get Value button 15 not available because it applies to more than one set of line provisioning parameters 4 To update the value use down arrow list and select the appropriate value 5 Click on Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click on Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made Set Date Purpose To display and or modify the current date and time of the NE Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select Set Date The following dialog box displays 166 The Provision Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 set Date And Time X V SNE FT D2 Date MM DDAY Time HH MM SS Set Value Close 2 Click on Get Value to see the current settings modify the settings type over them with the desired values and click on Set Value Set NE Purpose To set options for the current network element depending on the NE type Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select Set NE One of the following screens appears depending on the NE type A screen similar to the following appears for DDM 2000 OC 3 DDH 2000 OC 3 NE Options IDLE Shelf Current Yalue CO RT Selector Current Value ALMBMP Current Value CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Provision Menu e 167 168 The Provision Menu A screen similar to the following appears for DDM 20
124. Lag LI E End to End Path Menu 283 Delete End to End Path Purpose To delete an end to end path the Subnetwork View must be the current window so the End to End Path menu 15 available NOTE If you have created a locked arc end to end path containing two Ox1 cross connections CPro 2000 recognizes this as two separate paths You must delete each path individually Procedure 1 From the End to End Path menu select Delete The following screen appears Delete End to End Path List of Path Hames Delete Path Close 4 sts3 le 5 Path Information Tributary 4 Source TID 2 Destination TID 3 List of cross connections 2 Aid ls 4a Destination Aid sts3 1e 4 0NEWAYT LOC Fb6 TID F6 3 Source Aid sts3 14 4 Destination Aid ls 4a 0NEWAYT LOCA Fb6 BL 2 Click on the path name you want to delete The path name is highlighted NOTE For paths containing both active and standby cross connections for example DRI and OC 3 1 1 only the active cross connections are listed in the path index list Standby cross connections are not displayed in the list even though they are displayed in the Network Element View and are also deleted 3 Click on Close if you do not want to delete a path and you want to end this operation Click on Delete Path to delete the path and the following screen appears Delete End to End Path Caution Execu
125. Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations CPro 2000 User Manual 365 576 128 Helease 6 2 November 1999 Copyright 1999 Lucent Technologies Rights Reserved Printed in U S A Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing However this information is subject to change Lucent Technologies assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document Trademarks Datakit and SLC 2000 are registered trademarks of Lucent Technologies Hayes is a registered trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Inc MultiTech is a registered trademark of MultiTech Systems Trailblazer is a registered trademark of ITK Telecommunications Inc Microsoft and MS DOS are registered trademarks and Windows Windows 95 Workgroups Windows NT and Microsoft Paint are trademarks of Microsoft Corp VT 100 is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation SkyTel is a registered trademark of SkyTel Ordering Information The ordering number for the CPro 2000 User Manual only is 365 576 127 To order this or any other Lucent Technologies document and software call your Lucent Technologies account representative or contact the Customer Information Center CIC at 1 888 LUCENTS Customer Assistance or Technical Support You may call the Lucent Technologies Regional Technical Assistance Center RTAC at 1 800 225 or the Lucent Technologies toll free hotline
126. NCSECTRCZ EXPSECTRC M RESET ntu l z 1 status NOT APPLICABLE NTFCNCDE NA INCSECTRCZ EXPSECTRC M RESET ntu l1 3 1 status NOT APPLICABLE NTFCNCDE NA EXPSECTRC M RESET SECTRCA _ Page of 10 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Report Menu e 109 1l0 TheRepotMenu ___ _60 _ 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connections Overview The ability to create cross connections is available from a Network Element View Cross connections can be created in CPro 2000 using drag and drop technology The X Conns menu contains instructions on how to create and delete individual and ranges of cross connections it does not contain menu items Cross Connection Creation Drag and drop cross connection creation consists of selecting an available address for a cross connection having an X cursor appear denoting that you are currently in cross connection mode and dragging the X cursor to the destination address of the cross connection Individual as well as ranges of cross connections may be entered and deleted using drag and drop methods NOTE If you attempt to enter a cross connection by selecting a source and dragging the cross connection to a destination and no cross connection is entered your destination is probably incorrect Check the validity of your cross connection addresses I
127. NE NOTE It is important to delete any script file name that appears in the Script field This ensures that CPro 2000 uses any new settings you specified at login 6 Click on OK After the login process the CPro 2000 GUI window that appears displays the appropriate NE View or Subnetwork View depending on the view you selected 30 CPro 2000 Startup CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 iii Connecting to NE a Modem This access application 15 used where the PC running CPro 2000 employs a modem or a data communications network to access the CIT port of an NE CPro 2000 supports three types of modems Hayes compatible MultiTech compatible TrailBlazer compatible If you use a modem that is unsupported by CPro 2000 you can still use the AUI to directly send commands to the modem or you can use a script to send commands to your modem For modem to modem connections asynchronous modems are used at the SONET subnetwork access point and at the PC running CPro 2000 Both are connected to the tele phone network The subnetwork access point 1s the CIT or X 25 port of a DDM 2000 the CIT port of a FiberReach for 2000 the DCE CIT port the DTE CIT port or the X 25 port A PAD is required for all X 25 connections For modem to modem connections the default settings are normally acceptable for the modem at the PC end However the NE modem modem at the NE end must be set as follows see the NE User
128. NI file to 60000 milliseconds 60 seconds The user must exit CPro 2000 and restart for the changes in the CPRO INI file to take effect Application Error with colors display set to 64K If the user 1s using a PC with the color display set to 64K an application error may occur This is caused by an incompatibility between video drivers Workaround The user should change the color display to 256 colors to avoid this situation Backup amp Restore NE Reset During Restore Operation In a CPro 2000 restore operation some commands may cause the network element to reset In the case of FT 2000 it is difficult for CPro 2000 to determine if the network element has completed the reset If a command is sent during the restore operation which causes the network element to reset the user should wait seven to eight minutes before continuing on with restore clicking on the OK button in the restore message box Restoring ATTR ENV parameter During CPro 2000 backup operation the RTRV ATTR ENV command on DDM 2000 3 R6 2 network elements does not return a value for the ALMTYPE parameter During restore CPro 2000 attempts to set the ALMTYPE parameter and the command 15 rejected by the network element The command and network element response is noted in the restore log file Restoring ASGNMT parameter During a CPro 2000 restore operation the restore log report may report that an enter assignment command has been denied by the FT 200
129. Open or Close to open or close a Network Element View or the Subnetwork View The Open option is only available when Network Element Views or the Subnetwork View are not open e Click on Switch To to change the focus of the CPro 2000 GUI to the Subnetwork View The SNW View icon must be selected for Switch To to be available e Click on Login to log into an NE e Click on Logout to log out of the chosen node The Logout option is only available when you are logged into a node e Click on Close NodeMan to close the Node Manager The Node Manager also closes each time you complete a task e Click on one of the partition icons The Update Map Update Inventory and Rename buttons are activated Click on Update Map to get an updated view of that partition in the Subnetwork View Click on Update Inventory to update the information for that partition such as cross connections and port provisioning Click on Rename to give the partition a new name The following screen displays CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Access Menu e 67 Change Partition Enter new name for the partition Cancel Enter the new partition name and click on OK For example you may want to give the partition a name that identifies the contents of the partition more clearly Click on Cancel if you do not want to rename the partition Run Batch Commands Purpose To allow the CPro 2000 user to execute batch files containi
130. Path dialog box to complete the process The screen below shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path CPro 2000 2 GUI SVC FT3 5151 FT 2000 48 BH 7 2 Access Edit View Heport Provision Update Window Connes Alarme Help B Enter an STS 3 One way End to End Path FT 2000 OC 48 only Procedure 1 From the Subnetwork View select the End to End Path pull down menu or click on the right mouse button and select End to End from the pop up menu and then select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click on the tabs for STS3 signal rate and IWAY path type CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 209 Enter End T o End Path AWAY 3 Made Twv 3 Made Inte NOTE The form for FT 2000 OC 48 Release 7 X displays available tabs for STS3 STSI IWAY and 2WAY 2 Atthe bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose an add node Double click on the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot 3 Select the low speed slot to be used for this add node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen is correct click on OK The following screen appears 210 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Releas
131. Pro 2000 attempts to delete one of the pair and then the other Deleting the first deletes both so when CPro 2000 attempts to delete the second it is denied The user should repeat the Restore The 1 1 protected pair has been deleted by the first Restore so it will not cause a problem in the second Restore Since Restore does not execute any restore commands until the cross connections are deleted and the NE 1s checked for provisioning differences from the Backup file repeating the Restore will not adversely affect NE provisioning Differential Restore will fail under Microsoft Windows 95 A When running CPro 2000 under Microsoft Windows 95 Version 4 00 950 and 4 00 950A attempting a differential restore will fail Upgrade to version 4 00 950B or later of Windows 95 Cross Connections GUI AUI 306 Troubleshooting 2way Cross Connections Reported as 2 1ways For FT 2000 CPro 2000 reports 2way cross connections as two way cross connections 2way add drop is reported as a way add plus a way drop A 2way thru cross connection is reported as 1 East to West and a 1 West to East CPro 2000 does this to avoid confusion when editing cross connections For 2way cross connections each direction can be edited in CPro 2000 for Loca Locz Audit and Redline Cross Connection Lines Display Occasionally in the Network Element view for an OC 3 R11 0 node equipped with 24G U OLIUS cross connection lines may appear t
132. RTRV STS3C x conn must exist feat sts3c enabled SFTHR AID must be all AISNCSA AISNC RTRV CRS sts3e 12 x x x RTRV CRS stsl x fee pepe pe pe Line Line RTRV STS1 RTRV STS3C pst Perf set th oc12 RTRV TH OCI2 See SpecCond 630 all can be used to retrieve all these parameters s starts from R8 0 362 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table for DDM OC 12 with TL1 continued Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Special Conditions set th oc3 RTRV TH OC3 See SpecCond 630 all can be used to retrieve all these parameters s set th sts 1 RTRV TH STS1 See SpecCond 630 all can be used to retrieve all these parameters s KK pA PA PA 12 set th t3 RTRV TH T3 See SpecCond 630 CVL NEND all can be used to ESL NEND retrieve all these SESL NEND parameters s OOF NEND CVP NEND ESP NEND SESP NEND UASP NEND OOF FEND CVP FEND ESP FEND SESP FEND UASP FEND CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 363 Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table for DDM OC 12 with TL1 continued Restore Cmd Back
133. Reconfig Switch _____ rrvsync provisioned mode f ss CONCATenabld x p pr Clear Delay PMN Alarm 10 set attr env rtrv attr env Alarm RT only almtype desc set attr cont rtry attr cont RT only E tx x gt gt lt gt lt Port amp Line 13 set t3 rtrv t3 Mode AIS Alarm Level X X X Failure Thrshld X X X State FMT Format PM mode X X X frame X X X Format X X X Port amp Line set state t3 Primary State X Port amp Line 15 set ecl rtrv ecl Alarm level Signal Degrade thr amp Line 16 set state ecl sf rtrv ecl Primary State x Port amp Line 15 set oc3 rtrv oc3 Kbyte Message Syncmsg Signal Degrade thr Concat Mode Application OS3 I NSA AIS 366 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table for DDM OC 12 with MML continued Area Or Pot amp Line 16 set sts 1 set state sts Primary State NENNEN Channel 2 set sts3c rtrv sts3c Signal Degrade xconn must exist amp SA AIS feat sts3c enabled NSA AIS AID must be all set state sts3c Primary State rtrv crs X connection type Ring ID X conn 23 set crs set crs sts 1 set pmthres sect set pmthres line CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Restore Cmd Backup Cmd set state oc3 Primary State
134. SLC 2000 input buffer Workaround The user should hit the Return key several times at the subsystem prompt before clicking OK in the CPro 2000 GUI login box Unclear connectivity between partitions in Subnetwork View The display of partitions in the Subnetwork View may be unclear to the user When the partitions are in an unexpanded format the connectivity between the partitions may be labeled in an unclear or incomplete manner Once the partitions are expanded the connectivity between the partitions will be shown with more detail In a mixed subnetwork of FT 2000 and DDM 2000 the connectivity lines will appear when the FT node is inventoried Provisioning Setting NPPA status FT 2000 NEs With CPro 2000 when the user provisions the NPPA status for a tributary the change 15 propagated to all other NEs in the ring The open NEV windows may not reflect this NPPA status change It is recommended for the user to run Update Inventory on each open NEV window or run Update Partition Inventory LS Port Provisioning on Unequipped LS Slot In a CPro 2000 session connected to a FT 2000 Network Element the user 1s able to retrieve and set the low speed LS port provisioning In FT 2000 R7 2 if an unequipped low speed slot is chosen for provisioning retrieval Get Value the parameter box will return Current CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Troubleshooting 309 General 310 Troubleshooting Value The network ele
135. Subnetwork Purpose To access a subnetwork that has not previously been accessed or that has no subnetwork information saved for it This command 15 only available when no connection to a subnetwork is currently active Procedure 58 The Access Menu From the Access pull down menu select New Subnetwork The following Login dialog box appears Options Password Partition Partition Inventory Script DEFAULT SCR E If you have chosen New Subnetwork you have the option of selecting Partition Map or the Partition Inventory These options tell CPro 2000 to depict the topology of the subnetwork to which you are logged in for discovered partitions only A discovered partition is when CPro 2000 recognizes it as part of the subnetwork and knows its configuration If you do not check off Partition Map or Partition Inventory CPro 2000 does the following e logs into the local node e inventories the local node and displays its Network Element View If you select Partition Inventory CPro 2000 gathers information about all the nodes in the partition including cross connections equipage alarms and topology If you are going to be doing any type of subnetwork level task such as creating an end to end path it is necessary to take a Partition Inventory If the NE Interface is TL1 the user must either input a TID or select the TID of the initial login node from the down arrow list
136. T 2000 OC 46 2 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Window Menu 181 Tile Vertical Purpose To display the open windows on the CPro 2000 GUI in a vertical format Procedure 1 From the Window pull down menu select Tile Vertical The open windows are displayed as shown in the following screen 2000 2 Subnetwork View Access Edt View Repot End Path Update Window Alarme Help 2 e 2 ie Es bl gt mb 182 The Window Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Arrange Icons Purpose To arrange all iconified windows in an orderly fashion in the CPro 2000 GUI window Procedure 1 From the Window pull down menu select Arrange Icons iconified windows including both Network Element Views and the Subnetwork View are arranged in an orderly fashion as shown in the following screen 2000 2 GUI Subnetwork View Access Edt View Repot End Path Update Window Alarme Help 51 58285 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Window Menu 183 Window Toggle Purpose This feature allows the user to toggle easily between any open and iconified windows in the CPro 2000 GUI Procedure 1 Atthe bottom of the Window pull down menu the names of any open or iconified windows are displayed Click on your selection If the window is open it appears in front of any other windows If the window 15 iconified it is opened and d
137. T ULSDCC Enter UpperlayrSecion DCC ________ Enter User Security INH MSG_ Inhibit Message CT INIT REG Jjlhmitalize Register CT INIT SYS JlnializeSysem _ JOperae Alarm Cutoff _ Operate External Control Z Operate Loopback ECI CTC JOpemteLoopackOC3 LPBK DO a p pu E as RLS EXT CONT Release External Control RLS LPBK EC1 Release Loopback ECI CTC RLS LPBK OC3 ReleaseLoopackOC3 RLS LPBK T3 RelaseloobackT3 o o RLS PROTNSW OCI2 Release Protection Switch OC I2 RLS PROTNSW OC3 Release Protection 3 NENNEN RLS PROTNSW SWFBR Release Protection Switch on Switch Fabric RTRV AO Retrieve Autonomous Output RTRV ALM Retrieve Alarm amp Status Conditions RTRV ALM ENV_ Retrieve AlarmEnvironment Retrieve Attribute Alam Ss 2 po NENNEN RTRV ATTR CONT Retrieve Attribute Control RTRV rr RTRV ATTR rr RTRV CKT 11 326 Appendix 2000 OC 48 TL1 Commands CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 TL1 Command Description CPro 2000 Menu Item RTRV COND Update Alarms RTRV CRS STS3 Retrieve Cross Connection STS 3 Update Cross Connections RTRV EQPT Retrieve Equipment Update Network Element Inventory RTRV HDR Retrieve Header
138. TRV T3 Port amp ent t3 Line Port amp ent tl RTRV T1 Line KBYTE SYNCMSG AISNC SFTHR CONCAT RADIO SYNCMSG AISNC M 9 does not do sbyte not applicable OC 3 megasStar only Ed E gt lt gt lt gt lt Only if equipped with 24G U OLIU gt lt Port amp 1 RTRV ECI pst Line Port amp 7 ent ocl RTRV OCI pst Line OLIU X con 8 RTRV CRS sts Wem _ 1 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters 351 Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table for DDM OC 3 with TL1 continued Area Ord Restore Backup Parameter Special Conditions 62 71 72 8 0 81 90 91 ILI Channel ent vtl RTRV VTI SFTHR X X X X AISNCSA X X X X X X ALSNC X X X X PST X X X X X X X X X Channel ent sts 1 RTRV STSI SFTHR SFAIL X X X X AISNCSA X X X X X X AISNC X X X X Channel 9 Cet 9 RTRVTRALL 7777 690 x x x x x x x Bias X Perf 9 set th oc3 See SpecCond 630 OOF X X X X X B2CVL X X X X X X B2 ESL X X X X X X B2 ESA L X X X X X X B2 ESB L X X X X X X B2 SES L X X X X X X B2UASL X X X X X X PSC L X X X X X X Perf set th oc3 See SpecCond 630 B2CVL B2 ESL B2 ESA L B2 ESB L B2 SES L B2 UAS L PSC L
139. To alert users to network alarms by calling a pager number associated with the alarm level NOTES e Before you use the Pager feature you must ensure that a modem is installed according to the manufacturers recommendations e The Pager features are only available if Auto Alarm Polling is enabled The default pager setting 1s off e The pager feature supports only alpha numeric pagers with SkyTel subscriber service e CPro 2000 does not support alarm polling with the audible alarm or the alarm pager when the local node is DDM 2000 shelf using TL1 connections In this case the audible alarms and alarm pager features are unavailable for selection Procedure 1 If you have not already done so select the comm port that corresponds to your modem in the Modem Comm Port field of the Alarm page 2 Activate the pager feature by doing one of the following e From the Alarms menu select Pager e Click the Pager button located in the lower right corner of the GUI The feature 15 enabled if a check mark 15 visible against the Pager option and if the Pager button 1s pushed in If the system does not recognize the comm port for example if the selected comm port is connected to another device such as a mouse or CPro 2000 serial communications link the following message appears A Selected Comm Port is not available CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Alarms Menu 291 Alarm Preferences 292 The Alarms Menu
140. VT through Cross connects In an OCI2 ring with the DDM 2000 24G type OLIUs instead of VT cross connects CPro 2000 makes through cross connects as STS The 24G type OLIU is restricted to making VT cross connects in 3 of the 12 STS s allowing the OC 12 ring to use more of the limited VT bandwidth for VT drops End to end paths can be established only after taking a Partition Inventory However with an FT 2000 OC 48 the user may enter end to end paths between nodes that have open Network Element Views and have had individual NE inventories from the Update Menu To create an end to end path within a subnetwork you are prompted through a simple sequence of on line forms Once the path addresses have been chosen CPro 2000 creates the cross connections in the NEs to form the end to end path CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 185 Users creating end to end paths with CPro 2000 should be familiar with the procedures outlined in the user service manuals for the NE equipment The procedures in this manual are not a substitute for the user s skill and understanding of the process involved with creating paths in NEs In fact neither this manual nor CPro 2000 provide the test procedures necessary to verify the proper functioning of a newly created path You must implement the test procedures from the appropriate user service manuals NOTE No changes are made to any NE until the user has chosen OK Therefore the user ca
141. a connection to any NE in the subnetwork e simplification of most SONET NE commands through the use of a graphical user interface GUI CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 About This Manual 1 Centralized Work Center Personnel Work center personnel typically use operations systems OSs to access the various components of the network including the NEs to analyze provision and test the network and to dispatch the outside plant engineer for any necessary on site repairs to the NEs In this case CPro 2000 can provide access to an NE in the same way that an ASCII terminal provides access CPro 2000 uses the ASCII user interface AUI to establish communications with the NE The user can type commands into the AUI and receive an immediate response from the NE Conventions Used 2 About This Manual General Conventions Listed below are the general text conventions used throughout this user manual e The word select is used to indicate the activation of a menu command or a command button in a dialog box or Help window e The phrase click OK means that you can either click the OK button with the mouse or in most cases you can press the Enter key on the keyboard to carry out the action Bold type in text and procedures indicates words characters or items that you type point to or click on Titles of chapters being referenced in this manual also appear in bold type Italic type indicates NE commands and import
142. abling or silencing the audible alarm and configuring the audible alarm and pager You can access the alarm menu options from the GUI menu bar or by using shortcut key combinations See the Task Mapping section for a listing of menu items and shortcut key commands The Alarms menu commands Auto Alarm Polling Audible Alarms e Pager e Preferences Alarm Auto Polling Audible Alarms Pager Preferences CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Alarms Menu e 287 The Alarm feature in CPro 2000 Release 6 2 supports only the following NE Releases DDM 2000 OC 3 Releases 6 2 7 1 7 2 8 0 8 1 9 0 9 1 11 0 and 11 1 DDM 2000 OC 12 Releases 5 0 5 1 and 5 2 DDM 2000 Fiber Reach Releases 2 1 and 2 2 e FT 2000 48 Releases 6 0 7 0 7 1 and 7 2 NOTE The Audible Alarm and Pager features are only available when Auto Alarm Polling is enabled turned on Therefore the Audible Alarm and Pager options are grayed out when Auto Alarm Polling is disabled 2000 R6 2 GUI Access View E Auto Alarm Polling Audie elam Pager Preferences Auto Alarm Polling 288 The Alarms Menu Purpose To enable or disable automatic updating of alarm status at specific time repeat intervals for the selected network element The Auto Alarm Polling feature is enabled when it is shown with a check If there is no check mark against the Auto Alarm Polling command then the feature is di
143. active Procedure 1 From the Access pull down menu select Open Subnetwork The following screen appears and prompts you to select the file that contains the previously saved information for this subnetwork Select File for Opening Subnetwork ki ES File Folders EX 1 EN 2 List files of type Drives Subnetwork Files didi Help Hetwork 2 Click on OK to open the subnetwork using the information saved in this file At any time you can click on Cancel to dismiss the window and not open the subnetwork NOTE If CPro determines that there is a conflict between your saved subnetwork and the current subnetwork due to changes in the subnetwork a warning message will appear You then have the option of choosing Re Start to reestablish the subnetwork Continue to keep your saved version CPro may not work correctly or Cancel to disconnect from the subnetwork 3 following Login dialog box displays Note that the Partition Map and Partition Inventory options are grayed out and unavailable Since you are opening a subnetwork using previously saved information CPro 2000 will not gather new data during login 60 The Access Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 UserlD Password Partition Map Partition Inventory Script Browse NOTE If yo
144. alue all then the Get Value button is not available because it applies to more than one set of line provisioning parameters 4 To update values use down arrow list at each text box and choose the appropriate values for each option 5 Click on Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click on Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made 156 The Provision Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Provisioning OC 3 Line Options Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select OC 3 Lines The following OC 3 Provisioning dialog box displays for DDM 2000 OC 3 1 3 Line Provisioning Line Address Signal Degrade Threshold Current V alue Syne Message Current V alue AIS Alarm Current Value Set Value Close The following OC 3 provisioning dialog box displays for DDM 2000 OC 12 ring releases only OC 3 Line Provisioning m s Enter 0 3 Option Parameters Line Address Signal Degrade Threshold Message Current Value Application Current Value Line State c Current Value Set Value Close CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Provision Menu e 157 The following OC 3 Provisioning dialog box displays for 2000 0 3 Line Provisioning Mapping Alarm Severity Current Yalue Signal Degrade Threshold Current Ya
145. and Report Viewer The Report Menu gives the user the ability to retrieve path information equipment information alarm status NE history provisioning and performance monitoring reports of the reports are available in the Report Viewer CPro 2000 User Manual Release6 2 1 1 The User Interfaces 41 42 The User Interfaces e The Provision Menu enables the user to modify port line provisioning and NE options The Update Menu enables the user to requery the NEs about the current cross connections Partition or Network Element Inventory and alarm information The Window Menu allows the user to arrange GUI windows to fit his her viewing needs e The End to End Path Menu 15 only available from the Subnetwork View This menu enables a user to enter and delete end to end paths Also available in this menu 15 the capability of modifying the LocA and LocZ values for an FT 2000 OC 48 STS 3 or STS 1 end to end path The X Conns Menu contains instructions on how to enter and delete cross connections individually or in a range It does not contain the actual commands Cross connections are created or deleted by using drag and drop functionality This menu is only available while you are in a Network Element View window e The Alarms Menu allows you to turn on the following features Auto Alarm Polling Audible Alarm and Pager You can also set parameters for these features from the Preferences option of this menu
146. ands After removing these CPro 2000 sends the restore commands one by one 7 Click on Yes to continue NOTE If any differences have been discovered and reported the restore operation may be canceled by clicking on No The user can then correct any differences before proceeding If the restore is continued regardless of reported differences some restore commands may fail 8 Ifthe system detects any commands that would cause a reset and or result in the loss of DCC connectivity the following window displays 76 The Edit Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 El Br rpt tmp Iof gt lt INDICE S a E ItPro 2880 Restore Report for OC3 6 DDH 288H 06 3 R11 1 september 23 1999 18 58 The following commands need to be entered to complete the restore These commands may cause loss of communication to the HE and or reset These commands may be directly copied to the AUI window WARNING Change the TID last commands showing Tid If the TID is changed in the AUI CPro will need to be reset set ne AlmGrp 255 AGNE yes DSNE no Site 1 HE 5 IDLE ais Shelf 1 CORT RT TbAddr 1 To complete the restore process manually enter commands that appear in the Notepad window by doing the following Select the entire command line including the semicolon Copy the command by either pressing Ctrl C or selecting Copy from the Edit menu e n the AUI window place the insertion poin
147. ant new terms Titles of external documentation that 1s referenced also appear in italic type e Computer voice type indicates system messages shown on your screen Mouse Conventions At a minimum a two button mouse is required for operating CPro 2000 If you have a multiple button mouse CPro 2000 assumes that you have configured the left mouse button as the primary mouse button Any procedure that requires you to click with the mouse refers to the use of this left mouse button unless otherwise specified e Point means to position the mouse cursor so that the tip of the cursor rests the item you want to point to on the screen for example Point to STS 1 Click means to press and immediately release the mouse button without moving the mouse for example Click on VT1 5 e Double click means to click the left mouse button twice in quick succession for example Double click on the CPro icon to start CPro 2000 e Drag means to press the left mouse button and to continue pressing while moving the mouse for example Drag the cursor from the source slot of the cross connection to the destination slot e Drop means to release the mouse button after dragging the cursor to the desired location on the GUI for example Drop the cursor on the destination slot CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Keyboard Conventions e The names of keys appearing on your keyboard are shown with an initial capital letter for e
148. appropriate values for each option Click on Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click on Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Provisioning 053 Port Options Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select DS3 Ports The following DS3 Provisioning dialog box appears for DDM 2000 053 Port Provisioning Alarm Level Failure Threshold Current Value State Current Yalue PH Mode Current Yalue PH Format Current Value PH Frame Current Yalue AIS Alarm Current Yalue 7 BIT Current Yalue 7 Set Value Close The following DS3 Provisioning dialog box appears for FT 2000 053 Port Provisioning Enter 053 Option Parameters 5 Alarm Severity Current Value Signal Degrade Threshold Current Value Primary State 48 Current Yalue Secondary State DSH Current Value Set Value Close CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Provision Menu e 161 Choose port address AID by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the port address or AID box A list of all DS3 port addresses or AIDs for the current node 15 displayed Choose one Once a port address or AID is chosen you can click on Get Value to see how the port is currently provisioned If a port address or AID 1s chosen that contai
149. as Login Logout Partition Inventory and Partition Map See Node Manager in the chapter titled The Access Menu for further details Clicking on the title bar of an open window either a Network Element View or the Subnetwork View changes the focus of the GUI to that window While in the Subnetwork View double clicking on an NE node opens its Network Element View The focus of the GUI is then switched from the Subnetwork View to the open Network Element View While in a Subnetwork View you can rearrange the NE and partition icons by dragging them with the cursor The NE icons that appear in the Enter End to End Path dialog box can be moved in the same way e Clicking the right mouse button on a partition icon in the Subnetwork View brings up a pop up menu containing the following commands Open Partition Update Map Update Inventory End To End Path Reports and Rename e Clicking the right mouse button on an NE icon while in the Subnetwork View brings up a pop up menu containing the following commands Open NE View Close Partition Update Map Update Inventory End To End Path and Reports The Toolbar Frequently executed tasks such as using the Node Manager can be accomplished by clicking buttons on the toolbar instead of navigating through the menus The toolbar icons are shown in the illustration below although not all of the icons display at the same time The icons that display at any given time depend on which GUI
150. ase Relation Table for DDM OC 12 with TL1 continued Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Special Conditions side Sync 5 ent syncn RTRV SYNCN syncnmode syncfunction AISThres with BBS2B cct pac MDSW SIC OMD track Switch 5 RTRV SYNCN Alarm set attr alm RTRV ATTR ALM almdel clrdel pmn Male diis Alarm set attr env RTRV ATTR ENV ntfcnde Only RT X X X almmsg X X X almtype X X X Alam 6 RTRV ATTR CONT conttype Port amp 7 ent t3 RTRV T3 PBIT X X X Line NTFCNCDE X X X AIS X X X SFTHR X X X PST Enter separately X X X FMT X X X PMMD X X X LINECDE X X X FRAME X X X X X X Port amp 2 ent ecl RTRV ECI PBIT Line NTFCNCDE AIS SFTHR PST Enter separately FMT PMMD CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 361 X X X X X X X X Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table for DDM OC 12 with TL1 continued Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Special Conditions ELE Port amp ent oc3 RTRV OC3 KBYTE Line SYNCMSG X X SFTHR X X CONCAT Only for linear rel pst Enter separately X X int applications X X AISNC X X Port amp ent oc12 RTRV OCI2 KBYTE Line SYNCMSG X X SFTHR X X AISNC X X Feature KRTRV FEAT sise x x x Channel ent sts 1 5 51 x conn must exist SFTHR AID must be all AISNCSA AISNC Channel ent sts3c
151. asks on the subnetwork or on specific NEs in the subnetwork by selecting commands from the menus and objects from the graphical display Tasks that may normally require typing several long ASCII interface commands can be accomplished with a few mouse clicks in the GUI The GUI 15 developed to be common across several Lucent Technologies SONET products However since the ASCII interfaces of each product are slightly different from one another the graphical layer also provides the important function of minimizing such differences This enables the users to focus more on the network operations and less on syntax differences between different types of NEs CPro 2000 Customer Assistance Customer assistance and troubleshooting for CPro 2000 are available by calling 1 800 225 4672 Lucent Technologies toll free hotline number The hotline is staffed with technical representatives and is operational 24 hours a day seven days a week Consult your Lucent Technologies account representative for complete customer service and maintenance information Also available for technical assistance 1s the Regional Technical Assistance Center RTAC at 1 800 225 RTAC RTAC personnel troubleshoot field problems 24 hours a day over the phone and if necessary on site CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Introduction 5 System Requirements Hardware CPro 2000 R6 2 requires the following minimum hardware requirements e 486DX processor at 66 MHz with 16 MB
152. associated with the pager number NOTE It is recommended that you type a name in the Name field if one pager number is associated with one person However you can leave the Name field blank if more than one person is responsible for monitoring the pager The following message box appears if you do not enter a name in the Name field 296 e The Alarms Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 ALARM Field Empty 5 proceed without an entry click OK 6 In the Phone PIN field type the pager number using the format dashes optional 000 0000 PIN Pager Identification Number This 15 a required field the system will not permit you to proceed until you type a phone number in this field 7 Ifyou attempt to proceed without entering a phone PIN number in this field the following warning appears ALARM AN Must Enter Pin 8 Inthe Address Type section select the appropriate pager type Click 1 way for a one way pager and 2 way for a two way pager 9 Inthe Alarm Level section select the desired alarm level to be associated with the pager number The option are Critical Major Minor or None Selecting None excludes an entry from search list The number 15 not called if a network alarm 15 detected but the entry remains in the Call List Important It is recommended that you specify a pager number for every alarm level This ensures that for every network alarm the appropriate call list
153. ate the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click on Yes The following message box displays Enter End To End Path i End to End Path may be incomplete if the ring open Open rings will have na cross connects on the high speed or parent ring 10 Click on OK then click Cancel in the End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The screen below shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 2000 R6 2 GUI 0 3 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 611 1 2 Access Edit View Report Provision Update window Cone Alame aa 7 dum DDM 2000 06 3 811 1 2 o p m 1 HA me C b 2 2283 U OLIU nh EET Enter a VT1 5 T1 Locked End to End Path FiberReach only Procedure 1 From the End to End Path Menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click on the tabs for VT1 5 T1 signal rate and Locked Arc path type CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 233 Enter End To End Path ___ VT1 5 TI m1 gt s Choose a Locked Add Drop Node 2 Note The Locked Arc Path can contain 1 Locked or 2 Locked Xcons in the _ If there are 2 Locked Xcons in the path then the ring id associated with each locked con shall be opposite i Eae 2 Near the bottom of
154. ath form appears Enter End To End Path gt Twaoway Hing Transport Twoway Add Drop Node Selected Low Speed a Tributary m 1 Twoway Add Drop Node Selected Low Speed Note The RTS Path can contain 0 or 1 Twoways any number of Dual and pairs of Single Oxls valid pair of Single 15 is one 0 the service slot and the other to the protection slot 7 Ifthe information you have selected is correct click on OK to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Enter End To End Path Ea e Caution Execution of this command may affect service you want continue CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 199 8 Click on No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click on Yes The following message box displays End to End Path may be incomplete if the ring is open Open rings will have cross connects on the high speed or parent ring 9 Click on OK then click Cancel in the End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The following screen shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path 2000 R6 2 GUI 0 3 6 DDM 2000 OC 3 H11 1 2 Enter an STS 3C Two way End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 12 and OC 12 OC 3 mixed ring when OC 3 is equipped with 24G U OLIU NOTE For the STS 3C path type to be available the follo
155. ation about supported NEs refer to Appendix F Table of NE releases per CPro releases 6 e Introduction CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 New Features Listed below are the significant new features in CPro 2000 Release 6 2 e the audible alarm feature e the alarm pager feature For a list of NEs that are supported by these features refer to The Alarms Menu section of this manual CPro 2000 Release 6 2 also supports all new features and enhancements in CPro 2000 Release 6 1 2 as outlined in the Software Release Description dated June 1999 In particular CPro 2000 Release 6 2 supports the following new features and enhancements e provision for displaying any commands that would require the NE to reset in a separate window when the automatic restore 1s completed e enhancement of existing end to end path 3 node and 4 node interworking cross connections feature CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Introduction e 7 89 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Installation Overview This chapter gives step by step instructions for installing CPro 2000 software CPro 2000 Release 6 2 software media consists of seven 3 5 inch high density diskettes The chapter also explains how to customize CPro 2000 settings in accordance with your operating environment and preferences CPro 2000 Installation Procedure 1 Boot up your 2 Start Windows 95b 98 or NT Gf Windows 15 not already running 3 Insert the first of the six CPro 20
156. ations where Line States can be set CPro 2000 sets the state to AUTO if the user Selects the S parameter Provisioning OC 12 Line Options DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 R11 X and FT 2000 OC 48 R7 1 and 7 2 only Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select OC 12 Lines The following Line Provisioning dialog box appears for DDM 2000 OC 12 and OC 3 OC 12 Line Provisioning Signal Degrade Threshold Sync Message Current Value AIS Alarm Current Value Set Value Close 154 e The Provision Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The following Line Provisioning dialog box displays for FT 2000 OC 48 OC 12 Line Provisioning SUD Enter 12 Option Parameters Severity Lurrent Value Signal Degrade Threshold Current Yalue Protection OC12 Current Value Protection OC48 Current Value Syne Message Current Value Timimg Direction Current Value Secondary State Current Yalue Set Value Close 2 Choose a line address by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the line address box list of all the OC 12 line addresses for the current node 15 displayed Choose one 3 Once a line address is selected you can click on Get Value to see how the line is currently provisioned If a line address is chosen that contains the value all then the Get Value button is not available because it applies to more than one
157. ault script filename SCRIPT identifies the default data communications script file to be used for login for example DEFAULT SCR NOTE Automatic updating of the SCRIPT field in the Login dialog box is a feature of the CPRO INI file If a script name other than the one defined in the CPRO INI file 15 entered in the Login window the CPRO INI file is automatically updated to contain this new script file name If no script file name 15 used on the Login window then the CPRO INI file 15 updated to not contain a default script file name CPRODRV This section contains entries that determine AUI parameters TIMEOUT is the amount of time in milliseconds between CPro 2000 sending a command and the time it takes the NE to respond before CPro 2000 times out For example 30000 equals 30 seconds 100000 equals 100 seconds and 1000 equals 1 second This parameter should be increased when circumstances such as a very large network or slow response of the NE are causing CPro 2000 to timeout SETTINGS contains the PC settings in the following format port name baud rate parity data bits stop bits handshaking 1 9600 7 none is an example of the PC settings where COMI is the name of the port connected to an NE for use with CPro 2000 NOTE The settings listed in your default data communications script in most cases it is DEFAULT SCR supersede the setting information listed in the CPRO INI file LEFT TOP
158. aw Cancel Read the text in the Welcome dialog box then click Next The Software License Agreement dialog box appears Software License Agreement Please read the following License Agreement Press PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement LIMITED USE SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT NOTICE READ ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LIMITED USE SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT AGREEMENT PRIOR DOWNLOADING INSTALLING AND OR USING THE SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING INSTALLING AND OR USING THE SOFTWARE ACCOMPANYING THIS AGREEMENT INDICATES TOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT IM THE EVENT THAT DO NOT AGREE WITH OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT RETURN YOUR INVOICE DE SALES RECEIPT AND THE SOFTWARE AND THE INVOICE WILL BE CANCELED OF ANY MONEY YOU PAID WILL BE REFUNDED LIMITED USE SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT Do pau accept all the terms of the preceding License Agreement If you choose Setup Will To install CPro 2000 2 you must accept this agreement lt Back Tes Hn 9 Read the text in the Software License Agreement dialog box using the down arrow to access the remaining text 10 Click Yes if you accept the terms of the Agreement CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 If you do not accept the terms of the Agreement Click No Exit Setup box appears Exit Setup Setup is not complete IF you quit the Setup program now the progra
159. ay for a one way pager and 2 way for a two way pager 6 Click Send to start to send the text message to the specified pager number You should hear a dial tone and the sound of the modem dialing as it attempts to make a connection or Click Clear to remove any entries from both the Subscriber Pager Number and the Message Text fields If you clicked Send the following message appears 300 e The Alarms Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Alarm Preferences 455 2738 If you click Send again while transmission is in progress the following message appears Alarm N e 7 Click OK to return to the Pager Test page Notice that the Message Test field title has changed to reflect the current status of the transmission 8 Click OK to save the current settings and dismiss the Alarm Preferences dialog box or Close dismiss the dialog box without saving any settings CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Alarms Menu e 301 302 The Alarms Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Troubleshooting Listed below are problems that may occur while working with CPro 2000 and how to resolve these problems Problem Garbled NE communication due to a bad data connection between the PC running CPro 2000 and the NE s CIT port Action Try using a lower baud rate or making a new connection using a different route Problem A general abend or abnormal termination occurs from a power failure Windows abending and hardware p
160. ayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to 272 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen 15 correct Click OK following screen appears Choose the Timeslot 4 Select the timeslot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid timeslot numbers are displayed Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected Enter End To End Path Primary Mode Hing OC3 1 Selected Low Speed 1 1 4 Tributary m 1 1 4 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 273 5 You prompted to choose the secondary node in Ring A Double click on the desired node The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot 6 Select the low speed slot for the Secondary Node in Ring A Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected Enter End To End Path Locked Arc Twaoway Hing Transport 3 Intwk 4 Intwk Primary Mode Ring OC3 1 Selected Low Speed 1 1 4 Tributary m 1 1 4 Secondary Node Hing OC3 2 274 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 7 You prompted to select the primary node for Ring B Double click on the desired node The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot 8 Select the low speed sl
161. carrier You may now issue commands to the low speed side of the SLC 2000 See the SLC 2000 documentation for further information To exit the low speed side of the SLC 2000 type sonet 44 The User Interfaces 0000 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Menu Bar Toolbar Listed below are the commands available in the AUI menu bar Many of these commands are also in the AUI toolbar which includes the following from left to right in the toolbar New Window using default settings file Open Settings File Save As Settings File Send Delete Character Capture Connect Preferences Port Settings Modem Commands Connect Disconnect Open Script File 2 e The AUI menu bar contains the following e The File menu which contains the following commands New establishes a new AUI window using the default settings information Open provides a dialog box for opening a settings file and establishing a new AUI session using that file s settings Close causes the current AUI window to be closed and the AUI session to be disconnected If the current AUI session has a GUI session associated with it the GUI 1s closed also Save allows you to save your settings file The following settings can be saved to a settings file communications port baud rate parity stop bits data bits flow control connect preferences and modem commands of these settings are specified thro
162. ccessed two ways By using the arrows lt lt lt gt gt gt you can go through the report page by page either backward or forward You can also click on the Page box and edit the current page number to the page number you want NOTE The Page Up and Page Down keys on your PC keyboard do not work in the Report Viewer Also the scroll bar appearing on the right side of the Report Viewer does not take you to the next page of the report the scroll bar only takes you from top to bottom of an individual page Use the arrows as described above to access the next or previous page of the report 86 The View Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Print function brings up an abbreviated Print menu so that your report can be printed The Save function allows you to save your report to a file name so that it can be accessed at a later time through the Report Viewer command in the View menu The Close function enables you to close the report without saving it to a file unless you have already done so using the Save function The Settings function offers a full selection of print settings Use the Close Settings command to return to the basic report functions but not to close the report The View Menu 87 88 View Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Report Menu Overview The Report Menu contains commands that display information about end to end paths cross
163. ch menu contains a grouping of similar tasks The tasks that can be accomplished via the GUI and its corresponding menus are listed in the following table Keyboard shortcuts that can also be used to accomplish certain tasks are shown in parentheses with their respective menu items Menu Item Keyboard shortcut Access New Subnetwork Accesses a subnetwork that has not previously been accessed or has no subnetwork information saved for it Access Open Subnetwork Accesses a subnetwork that has subnetwork information that has been saved to a file in a previous CPro 2000 session CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Task Mapping 49 Menu Item Task Keyboard shortcut Access Close Subnetwork Disconnects from a subnetwork that is currently Ctrl C being accessed Access Save Subnetwork Saves a subnetwork s information to a file so you Shift Ins can restart your next session with this subnetwork without having to requery the NEs Access Save Subnetwork As Saves a subnetwork s information to a file when Ctrl U you are saving a subnetwork s information for the first time or when you are saving it to a different file name Access Print Window Prints out your Subnetwork view to a printer Subnetwork view only Access Close Window Closes the window that currently has the focus in Ctrl D the GUI Does not log you out of an NE or subnetwork Access Close All Windows Closes all windows that are currently open Does
164. ck on No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click on Yes The following message box displays 1 End ta End Path may be incomplete if the ring is open Open rings will have cross connects on the high speed a or parent ring 9 Click on OK then click Cancel in the End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The screen below shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path CPro 2000 86 2 GUI SVC FT3 5T51 FT 2000 OC 48 R 7 2 Access Edit Provision Update Window amp Conns Alarms 2 S YC FT3 5151 2000 0 48 7 2 SEES la2b 3 4 546b 4 k EN 5 1e 5 1 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 213 Enter an STS 1 Two way End to End Path 2000 OC 48 Release 7 X only Procedure 1 From the End to End Path Menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click on the tabs for STS1 signal rate and 2WAY path type Enter End To End Path NOTE When the Audit On box is checked the alarm feature that notifies the user of any signal problem is activated To turn off this feature click on the box to remove the check mark 2 Atthe bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose the fi
165. ckup Restore Parameters Backup Restore Overview The CPro 2000 Backup command is used to create backup files of the current equipage cross connections and provisionable parameters of a network element node The files created during a backup can then be used by the CPro 2000 Restore command for restoration of this data at a later date See the Edit Menu chapter for information on how to backup and restore files Cross Reference Tables for CPro 2000 Backup Restore Commands The following tables provide a cross reference between the CPro 2000 Backup Restore command parameters and the supported network element releases For more information on the commands used in backup and restore see the Lucent Technologies User Service Manual for the appropriate network element release CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 341 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for FiberReach with 111 Area NL NL Restore Cmd BackupCmd Cmd Special Conditions System ent sys RTRV TID DSNE Site NE co rt selector tbos display tbos backup tbrem idle agne almgrp STS uneqpt AIS VT uneqpt AIS 2 2 System RTRV CID SECU state o System RTRV USER SECU uid msgtype Pee mes side mm pee a dslpm Sync RTRV SYNCN syncnmode syncfunction sync auto config pun ue pss
166. connections equipment alarms port options and performance monitoring PM data Any reports may be saved to a file and accessed at a later time by using the Report Viewer command in the View menu There are two ways of accessing report options while in a Subnetwork View You can use the Report menu on the menu bar which is the method described in the following procedures The other method 15 to select a closed or unexpanded partition with a single left mouse button click and click on the right mouse button to display a pop up menu containing a Reports submenu The following report options are available while in a Subnetwork View e Path e Cross Connections Timeslot Usage e Path Provisioning Errors FT 2000 e Paths in Tributary FT 2000 Bandwidth Usage CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Report Menu 89 NOTE Reports generated while in the Subnetwork View contain data for the current selected partition only To gather data for the entire subnetwork a report must be created for each partition in the subnetwork From a Network Element View the following report options are available Cross Connections e Map e Alarms History e Equipment e Protection State FT 2000 R7 1 and 7 2 only Port Slot Options e PM Data e All OPT OLS only e All SUPR OLS only e All CMS OLS only e Section Trace OLS only 90 The Report Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Report Screen Functions CP
167. cro definition and uses that value to execute the script statement Macro definition statement syntax is shown below MACRO NAME Prompt line Range of valid values Default value where the syntax contains the following elements no n macro name followed by prompt line terminated by a string containing a range of values followed by a default value optional Macro Example First the macro call appears in the script file as shown in the following sample transmitt set attr alm almdel ALARM DELAY The macro definition appears at the end of the script file as shown in the following sample ALARM DELAY Enter the alarm holdoff delay in seconds 0 32 2 This macro example causes a dialog box to display if you are in Expert mode with the message prompt Enter the alarm holdoff delay in seconds and an input range of values of 0 30 A text input field for typing in the value also appears in the dialog box Press Return to accept the value Using Functions and Macros Together Macros can be used to allow the user to supply values to a function during its execution In the following example when the function 1s called the user is asked for the value of the DSNE parameter the value of the AGNE parameter and to enter three additional parameters and values If the user does not have three additional parameters to enter they can send carriage returns for each prompt 336 Appendix D Script and Batch Files CPr
168. ct Layer 3 or Layer 4 CAUTION THIS PROCEDURE AFFECTS DCC CONNECTIVITY The following dialog box displays for Layer 3 Provisioning of 51 Parameters x Set Layer 3 051 Parameters Set Value The following dialog box displays for Layer 4 Provisioning of 051 Parameters x Set Layer 4 051 Parameters C Cunen Vatue LAAISYS TUE Set Value Close 172 The Provision Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 2 Click on Get Value to see the current settings 3 modify the settings type over them with the desired values and click on Set Value NOTE Certain parameters are read only and cannot be changed See the appropriate Lucent Technologies User Service Manual for further details and acceptable values CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Provision Menu 173 174 The Provision Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Update Menu Overview From a Network Element View you can update the following information in CPro 2000 using the Update Menu Inventory X Conn Alarm Active User OC 3 R11 1 only From the Subnetwork View you can update the following information in CPro 2000 using the Update Menu Update Update Inventory These menu items are detailed in the following procedures Inventory NE View Purpose To retrieve the NE equipage and update the Network Element View acc
169. ctions For FT 2000 OC 48 R7 NEs The West side displayed on the left side represents interfaces to the west STS 3 high speed tributaries with three STS 1 tributaries contained in each STS 3 The East side displayed on the right side represents interfaces to the east STS 3 high speed tributaries with three STS 1 tributaries contained in each STS 3 The bottom displays four groups of low speed slots 053 or OC3 Each contains four slots Every low speed slot contains three STS 1 time slots that represent the DS3 ports DS3 slot ports on slot or STS 1 tributaries on slot The Menu Bar All of the functionality of CPro 2000 is available through the menu bar in the GUI window In addition some of these commands can be accessed through the right mouse button pop up menu Listed below are the menu names and the types of commands they contain e tems that pertain to logging into or out of the NEs are found in the Access Menu This menu also allows the user to run batch command files print windows save the current subnetwork s information to a file open the Node Manager and to exit the CPro 2000 application Operations for backing up restoring and changing TIDs or passwords are found in the Edit Menu e The View Menu allows the user to show or hide cross connections and to change the way the toolbar and status bar in the GUI are viewed You can also access the Subnetwork View
170. d the NE automatically enters the protection cross connection CPro 2000 displays the protection cross connection the next time the cross connections are updated Enter STS 1 Drop and Continue Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 and FiberReach R2 2 equipped with 28G U OLIU in the mains Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click on the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The following screen appears when you release the mouse button Cross Connection Properties NOTE The following restrictions must be followed to create a drop and continue cross connection CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connections e 135 One address in the cross connection must be a main and one address must be low speed slot For DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 the low speed slot being used in the cross connection must contain an STS 1E or an OLIU circuit pack 2 Click on Cancel if the addresses shown in the screen are incorrect Click on OK and the following screen appears Contirm Cross Connection Enter Enter Drop And Continue From mb 4 b 1 Ring Direction mbi Caution Execution of this command may affect service NOTE The Ring Direction for the cross connection 15 specified according to which high speed side is involved when establishing the cross connection m1 mb1 side vs m2 mb2 side 3 Click o
171. d Drop Primary and Secondary nodes in the ring e The STS3 C feature must be enabled for each node in the ring This feature 15 enabled in MML using the SET FEAT command and in TL1 using the ENT FEAT command See your DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual for complete details Enter End T o End Path Ciz mb gt mb mb 1 gt nz HE a HE OC 1z OC 12 3 me 1 gt mb 2 Atthe bottom of the form you are prompted to choose the Add Drop Node Double click on the node you have selected The following screen displays Choose the Low Speed Slot 3 Select the low speed slot for the Add Drop node from the scroll list Only valid slot numbers are displayed Click on OK The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 249 Choose the Timeslot 4 Select the timeslot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid timeslot numbers are displayed Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the Add Drop node information you have selected Enter End To End Path 3 Node Intwk im mb l mbz me 1 S ike oF 12 ur 12 3 me 1 gt mb Add Drop Mode OC1 2 2 Selected Low 5peed Tributary 5 At the bottom of the form you are prompted to choose the Primary Node Double click on the node you have selected The following screen appears 250 The
172. d Low Speed 1 Tributary m 2 Secondary Node Ring OC3 2 Selected Low Speed b 1 268 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 7 You prompted to choose the primary node for Ring B Double click on the desired node The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot 8 Select the low speed slot for the primary node in Ring B Click on OK The main end to end path form appears Enter End To End Path Primary Mode Hing Aj 3 1 Selected Low Speed a 1 Tributary m 2 Secondary Node Hing OC3 2 Selected Low Speed b 1 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 269 9 You are prompted to select the secondary node for Ring B Double click on the desired node The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot 10 Select the low speed slot for the secondary node in Ring B Click on OK The main end to end path form appears Enter End To End Path Primary Mode Ring OC3 1 Selected Low Speed a 1 Tributary m 2 Secondary Node Ring OC3 2 Selected Low Speed b 1 270 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 11 If the information you have selected is correct click on OK to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Enter End T o End Path Es e Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want continue 12 Click on No if you do not want t
173. d to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Choose the Low Speed Slot 6 Select the low speed slot for the primary node Click on OK The main end to end path form appears Enter End To End Path ES Twv 3 Made Inbwk AWAY 3 Intwk 4 Intwk 45 5 0 4 2 Secondary Node OC48 1 Selected Low Speed Tributary stz3 1e 3 Primary Mode OC 48 4 Selected Low Speed Is 4a 7 You prompted to choose the drop node Double click on the desired node The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 261 Choose the Low Speed Slot 8 Select the low speed slot for the drop node Click on OK The main end to end path form appears Enter End To End Path 3 Made 0 48 3 2 Secondary Node OC48 1 Selected Low Speed Tributary sts3 1e 3 Primary Mode 4 Selected Low Speed Is 4a 9 If the information you have selected is correct click on OK to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Enter End To End Path e Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want continue 262 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 10 Click on No if you do not want to create the end to end path of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click on Yes The following message box displays E
174. dress Pack Code Number Code Code Number tg 1 BBFZB 33 4 201779 G5MvIZ SSUISB TGS Sa 24 201779 017257 PID AGAEC main 1 OL IT 2 21 1 SNRXDi1CAAA 210518 85MvV1Z 629765 main Z OLIU 2 51 1 SNRXDiCAAA 210518 95M712069591 4 m PE CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Report Menu 101 Protection State FT 2000 48 H7 1 and 7 2 only Purpose To view a report that shows the non preemptible protection access NPPA protection switching state for the current node The protection state report is only available from an FT 2000 OC 48 Network Element View As described in Report Screen Functions earlier in this chapter you can perform a variety of tasks on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report Procedure 1 From the Report pull down menu select Protection State A report similar to the following appears Metwork Element Protection Switching State 2000 Protection Switching State Report for CURLY June 27 1997 4 11 54 Report of protection switching state Output of ETEV 5TATE command CURLY 97 06 27 ll eq 2 1G3 ACT rcvr le BCWVR IACT rcvr lw RCVBRIACT etsl lwu Il l ALI ACT t
175. e SET FECOM Set Far End Communications d Provision Set NE _ SET LGN Set Login SET LINK Setlink __ Jo SET NE Provision Set NE SET OCI2 SET OC3 SET PASSWD Set Password Edit Change Password SET PMTHRES LINE Set Performance Monitoring Threshold 7 Line SET PMTHRES SECT Set Performance Monitoring Threshold Section SET PMTHRES STSI Set Performance Monitoring Threshold STS 1 SET PMTHRES T3 Set Performance Monitoring Threshold T3 SET SECU SET STATE ECI Set State 5 5 5 3 Set Synchronization _____ SWITCH EN Protection Switch Function Unit SWITCH LINE si Protection Switch Line CTC SWITCH PATH STS Switch Path STS L CE SWITCH SYNC JProtection Switch Synchronization SWITCH TSI Protection Switch Time Slot Interchange Alarm _____ _____ TEST AUTO JTestAwoTunp JTesLEDIndicatrs CTC TEST S YSCTL si Test System Controllers TEST TLM PAR Test Telemetry Parallel 5 Test Telemetry Serial _TEST TRMSN T3 Test Transmission T3 O ______ TOGGLE Ct T Toggle UPD ___ CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix DDM 2000 OC 12 Commands 323 DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual Task Oriented Procedures Purpose The purpose of this section 1s t
176. e By Date Time available for MML only and then enter the desired Start Stop Dates and Start Stop Times Click OK You may click on Cancel to close the window and no report is generated A report similar to the following appears gt Network Element History Report x CPro 2000 History Report for OC3 7 2000 2 September 20 1999 14 15 12 Maintenance History Report Date Time Sys Alm SOURCE Event Level Description 01 05 21 06 06 CRITICAL cit Z remote session terminated 01 05 20 24 12 CRITICAL cit Z rlon Lucol 01 05 20 14 38 CRITICAL cit Z set state stsl m 1 01 05 20 14 55 CRITICAL cit Z set stsl m 1l 01 05 20 14 53 CRITICAL cit z ent cers vtl m 1 7 1 v 4 View Page of 6 100 The Report Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Equipment Purpose To view a report that shows the equipage for the current node The equipment report option is only available from a Network Element View As described in Report Screen Functions earlier in this chapter you can perform a variety of tasks on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report Procedure 1 From the Report pull down menu select Equipment A report similar to the following appears Network Element Equipment Report CPre Z2000 Equipment Report for OC3 7 2000 September 20 1999 18 17 46 Equipage and Version Report Slot Circuit Apparatus Series CLEI ECI Serial Ad
177. e 6 2 5 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The following screen appears asking the user to confirm the cross connection deletion Confirm Cross Connection Delete Ei Delete Twoway From 1 1 Caution Execution of this command may affect service Tes to All 1 Click on Yes to if you want to delete all of the cross connections in the range Click on Yes if you want to delete each cross connection in prompted mode While in prompted mode click on No if you do not want to delete one of the cross connections in the range Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation If you choose to delete multiple cross connections the following screen appears Warning Please Confirm Your Action You have selected multiple Cross Connections to be deleted Are you sure you want to delete ALL of them Select No to reconsider deleting all Cross Connections Click on Yes to delete the selected cross connections Click on No if you do not want to delete the selected cross connections Cross Connections e 151 152 Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Provision Menu Overview The Provision Menu allows the user to display current port provisioning options and to modify these options as needed of the port provisioning functions are provided as menu items Also included in the Provision Menu 15 the Set NPPA Set Date Set NE Set Feat Set CID S
178. e 6 2 Choose the Tributary sts3 le 1 stz3 1e 2 stz3 1e 3 stz3 1e 4 sts3 1e 5 sts3 1le 6 sts3 le sts3 1e 8 sts3 le 9 sts 3 1le 10 sts3 1le 11 stz3 1e 12 sts3 1e 13 co 1 1 a 1 4 4 Select the tributary that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid tributary numbers are displayed Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected Enter End T o End Path AWAY 3 Made Intel Twv 3 Made Intel SVC FTS Add Node S C FT3 Selected Low Speed Tributary sts3 1e 10 5 You are prompted to choose the drop node Double click on the desired node The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 211 Choose the Low Speed Slot ls fa I 7h 6 Select the low speed slot for this drop node Click OK The main end to end path form displays Enter End T o End Path SVc rT3 Add Node 5vVC FT3 Selected Low Speed Tributary sts3 1e 10 Drop LSO1 FT3 Selected Low Speed Is 2b 7 You are prompted to choose another drop node for creating a multi drop path or to create the end to end path When ready to create the path click on OK The following screen appears Enter End To End Path Es e Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want continue 212 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 8 Cli
179. e 6 2 NOTE abel must be specified in the script file it should be preceded by a and appended by a colon for example advice CONNECT Connects to the COM port NOTE COM port settings are specified with the SETTINGS command The default settings are COM2 9600 e 7 1 none SETTINGS string Sets the COM port to given settings where string 15 enclosed between double quotations and contains the following in sequence 1 a Oy aps m 11 port name for example COM1 or 2 This setting may be excluded colon This is excluded if the COM port name is not specified baud rate for example 9600 or 4800 comma parity for example e o or n comma data bits for example 7 or 8 comma stop bits for example 1 or 2 comma handshaking This command can be used before or after connecting to a COM port Examples SETTINGS COM1 9600 e 7 1 none settings do00y 9 2 DISCONNECT Disconnects from the COM port The open bracket symbol used in an IF or ELSE statement The close bracket symbol used an IF or ELSE statement CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix D Script and Batch Files 333 Functions string A semicolon symbol used at the beginning of a statement that indicates that this line contains a comment where string 1s the comment Example is comment The use of functions 15 supported
180. e Name field Type the new name in the selected field A phone or PIN number the Phone PIN field select the existing information then type the replacement The alarm level a different alarm option in the Alarm Level section An pager type the correct pager type in the Address Type section 5 From within the Call List page click OK to save the current settings and exit the Alarm Preferences dialog box or click Close exit the dialog box without saving any settings Deleting call list entries To delete call list entries 1 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Click the Call List tab to display the call list page 3 Select an entry you want removed from the list NOTE Choosing either a name or phone number removes all data associated with that entry from the list 4 Click Delete The following confirmation message box appears ALARM 2 Do vou really want ta delete this entry Cancel 5 Click OK to delete the entry or click Cancel to withdraw the command 6 Click OK save the current settings and dismiss the Alarm Preferences dialog box or Close dismiss the dialog box without saving any settings 298 e The Alarms Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 lii The Providers Tab This 15 read only tab that displays the name and phone number of the pager service provider To view this information 1 From the Alarms
181. e One Transaction Language One A syntax used in OS NE communications VT1 5 A SONET virtual tributary logical signal with a bit rate of 1 728 Mbps capable of DS1 payload X 25 port The DTE to DCE interface between a synchronous host and a packet switched data network 390 Glossary of Terms CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Index A Access Menu 23 25 28 30 31 35 41 46 47 57 313 Active User 175 76 Alarm Preferences 292 95 297 301 310 Alarm status 23 35 36 41 51 53 54 83 99 176 288 90 307 Alarms 35 26 51 53 55 58 89 90 99 289 95 297 300 310 316 322 327 Alarms Menu 7 23 41 42 54 287 289 300 313 Alarms report 99 Arrange Icons 53 179 183 311 ASCII User Interface AUI 2 5 43 385 Audible Alarms 287 289 91 Audit On 112 130 134 141 145 147 214 219 286 307 AUI menu bar 45 AUI toolbar 45 Auto alarm polling 42 53 54 287 89 291 92 307 B Backup 15 35 50 71 74 76 288 305 6 341 81 Backup amp Restore 5 303 311 313 339 Bandwidth Usage report 40 97 Batch files 18 29 57 59 68 329 334 339 Baud rate 16 26 31 45 303 333 385 C Cancel dialog box 36 Capture Menu 45 Cascade 53 179 80 311 Change LocA and LocZ 112 146 Change Pass XE Password word 51 Change Password 71 79 323 325 Change TID 50 71 78 326 CIT port 1 21 22 27 30 31 303 385 Close Partition 50 57 69 Close Windows 50 57 6
182. e available for selection Click on the tabs for STS3 and 2WAY 3 Node Intwk path type Enter End To End Path 3 Made Inbwk 0 48 3 45 2 2 Atthe bottom of the form in the dialog box you prompted to choose the secondary node Double click on the desired node displayed within the form The following screen displays Choose the Low Speed Slot CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 259 3 Select the low speed slot for the secondary node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen is correct click on OK The following screen appears Choose the Tributary sts3 le 1 jsts3 le szIz3 1e 3 5123 12 4 istz3 1e h 123 stz3 le 7 sts3 1e 8 sts3 1e 9 sts3 1e 10 sts3 1le 11 stz3 1e 12 istz3 1e 13 4 Select the tributary that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid tributary numbers are displayed Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected Enter End To End Path 3 Made Inbwk 3 Inbwk 4 0 48 3 0 48 2 Secondary Node OC48 1 Selected Low Speed Tributary sts3 1e 3 5 You are prompted to choose the primary node Double click on the desired node The following screen appears 260 The En
183. e commands can be issued to unequiped resources in FT because it supports pre provisioning SpecCond 510 When the value to be restored exceded the valid range the default value shall be used instead Both the default value and the range are provided in the Parameter Values Tables SpecCond 520 Security restoration shall be conducted only in the MML mode for both FT and DDM network elements Passwords are always encripted and cannot be restored SpecCond 530 Cross connection restoration shall be checked for the followings 1 connection type 2 allthe end points of the connection type 3 low speed end points 4 protection mode 5 if the conflicting cross connection in existance is part of a path Note that when a cross connection to be restored consists of low speed end point s and not all the end points match with existing cross connections 1t 15 in conflict with two cross connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters 379 540 For DDM network elements Channel States shall be set only cross connected and conform to the following cases 1 VTI 5 channels to DS 1 OC 3 or EC 1 interfaces 2 STSI channels to DS3 D amp C 0x1 ADR or 05 3 STS3C channels from main to OC 3C interface units SpecCond 550 line states are applicable only to OC 1 lines terminating on 27 type or 26G2 U OLIUS in OC 3 systems SpecCond 560 1 port states are only applicabl
184. e implemented If you want to proceed click on Yes The following message box displays Enter End T o End Path End to End Path be incomplete if the ring is open D pen rings will have cross connects on the high speed i or parent ring 9 Click on OK then click Cancel in the End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The following screen shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path 2000 R6 2 GUI DC 3 6 DDM 2000 OC 3 R11 1 2 Access Edit View Report Provision Update Window Connes Alarms Help Ae 21 F 0 3 7 DDM 2000 OC 3 R11 1 2 x Jue b DDM 2000 OC 3 9111 2 m 3 mE U Enter VT1 5 T1 Two way End to End Path FiberReach only Procedure 1 From the End to End Path Menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click on the tabs for VT1 5 T1 signal rate and Twoway path type CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 193 w ml gt ma NSL FE C N3L PR D 2 Atthe bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose the first add drop node Double click on the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears 3 Select the low speed slot to be used for this add drop node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the s
185. e returned to the Subnetwork View Print Window Purpose To print out your current Subnetwork View window Procedure 1 From the Access pull down window or from the toolbar icon select Print Window The following window appears Subnetwork Map View SHC 0C12 DD 4 Emu ET EE m 2 Youcan perform the following functions on this map capture CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Access Menu 63 e The View function allows you to make the size of the map capture larger smaller by selecting a value from the View down arrow list e The Print function brings up an abbreviated Print menu so your map capture can be printed out The Save function allows you to save your Subnetwork View to a file name so it can be accessed at a later time through the Report Viewer command in the View menu e The Close function enables you to close the Subnetwork using the Save function The Settings function offers a full selection of print commands Use the Close Settings command to return to the basic functions of the screen but not close the map capture Close Window Purpose This command closes the window that currently has the focus the GUI This command does not log a user out of an NE or subnetwork Procedure 1 From the Access pull down menu select Close Window 2 The window that currently has the focus in the GUI 1s closed Close Windows Login 64 The Access Menu Pu
186. e to OC 3 or OC 12 equiped with STSIE circuit packs set to LOW SPEED with hardware switch The STSIEs must be cross connected to main with no VT cross connections SpecCond 570 If the user specified that the target NE 1s to be treated as RT and the backup is from a CO NE then default values shall be used for the SET ATTR ENV and SET ATTR CONT commands If the user specified that the target NE 1s to be treated as CO and the backup 15 from a RT NE then the SET ATTR ENV and SET ATTR CONT commands are not needed SpecCond 580 Optical Transmitter Power applies to 21G OLIU only and not other types of OLIU SpecCond 590 If the current value of the ENT TI Line Coding parameter in the target NE is different from the value in the backup file the backup value shall be used and warning message shall be displayed SpecCond 600 For DDM Nes the switch settable parameters of STSIE pack shall be compared with that on the backup file If they don t agree the restoration shall not proceed 380 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 610 The following values of the port state parameter are equivalent OOS MA AS in TL1 AUTO in MML OOS TL1 NMON in MML SpecCond 620 Far end communication must be enabled for TL1 messages If the current value and the backup value are different Cpro shall display a warning message and set it enabled SpecCond 630 The DDM convention
187. e used inside commands that are used to modify parameter values on an NE The following example macro definition asks the user to enter the value for a parameter PARAMETER Enter User Side Network Side Value us This macro definition has no range of values but it contains the default us The following is an example of how this macro definition might be used transmitt no PARAMETER The following conditions apply to using macros in a script or batch file Any number of macros can be used in one script line e Amacro can be used anywhere in a script any number of times however there can only be one definition for each macro The input range shown in the dialog box see Macro Example does not apply validation for the value typed in by the user e There is no datatype associated with the input value It is treated as a character string CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix D Script and Batch Files e 335 Macro Syntax To define a macro place a macro definition statement at the end of the script file When CPro 2000 is running a script and finds a macro the macro definition statement supplies the necessary information to prompt the user for a value or to supply a default value A macro 15 called into a script using the following syntax any script statement 5 NAME where the macro name is enclosed by parentheses and preceded by a sign MACRO NAME gets a value returned from the ma
188. ears when you release the mouse button CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connections e 139 Cross Connection Properties 5r AID gt Dest AID gt sts3 1le 5 TID s D5L 123455783012345B Loc 051 123456 78901 23458 2 Click on Cancel if the AIDs shown in the screen are incorrect Select the DRI cross connection icon third from left hand side of toolbar in the Cross Connections Properties dialog box Select the Source and Destination TIDs from the down arrow lists Click on OK and the following screen appears Contirm Cross Connection Enter Enter Oneway DAI From Iz ba zEz3 1e 5 Secondary TID DSL 123456 78901 2345B Drop TID 051 123456 78901 23458 Caution Execution of this command may affect service vss 3 Click on Yes if you want to establish the cross connection Click on No if you do not want to establish this cross connection Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 4 cross connection appears the Network Element View as shown in the following sample Note that the primary cross connection is shown with a solid black line and the secondary cross connection is shown with a dashed line 140 Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 BH DSL 123456789012345B FT 2000 48 6 0 Zi ES EIN 74
189. ection tributaries indicates that the tributary is in service without any protection and is non preemptible This scheme applies to both STS 1 level and STS 3 level NPPA statuses In the case of STS 3 all four slots pertaining to an STS 3 level tributary which includes an STS 3 slot as well as three corresponding STS 1 slots will turn yellow at the same time There will not be NPPA status at levels lower than STS 3 In the case of STS 1 individual STS 1 slots have their own status If any one of the STS 1 slots is not NPPA enabled the corresponding STS 3 slot is shown as NPPA disabled Only if all three of the STS 1 slots that correspond to an STS 3 tributary are NPPA enabled will the corresponding STS 3 slot be shown as NPPA enabled CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Color Conventions for the Network Element View Listed in the following table are the color conventions displayed in the Network Element View and what they represent If you are using a monochrome monitor these colors display in varying degrees of gray tones Color Representation Slots that are not equipped or ports slots 9 all Lines that indicate cross connections they can be solid or dashed depending on the n cross connection type Port slots available for cross connections Purple Port slot that 1s an endpoint for a displayed cross connection or port slot that 1s selected Dark Blue ports slots where cross connections exist when the lines r
190. ecu Update Ne and OSI Stack options WARNING The following commands cause a reset and or result in the loss of DCC connectivity These commands are displayed in a separate Notepad window and must be manually entered in the AUI to complete the restore process Refer to the Edit Menu section of this manual for information on how to copy these commands into the AUI DDM 2000 MML DDM 2000 TL1 FT 2000 TL1 The following provisioning options are supported OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 11 and FT 2000 OC 48 R7 1 and 7 2 only DDM 2000 3 R9 X 11 X and FiberReach only OC I2 DDM 2000 OC 3 equipped with 24G type OLIUs OC 3 DDM 2000 and 2000 48 OC 48 FT 2000 OC 48 R7 1 and 7 2 only DSI DDM 2000 OC 3 only e FiberReach only DS3 Not applicable to FiberReach Not applicable to FiberReach e LS FT 2000 OC 48 only OPT Channels OLS only SUPR Channels OLS only CMS Ports OLS only Set NPPA FT 2000 OC 48 R7 1 and 7 2 only CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Provision Menu 153 e Set Date Set NE Set Feat DDM 2000 only Set Secu 2000 48 7 2 and OLS only Update NE OSI Stack OLS only NOTES In the following procedures information cannot be typed directly into the parameter boxes that are displayed Selections must be made by highlighting the appropriate value from the down arrow lists e n situ
191. ecution of this command may affect service Do you want continue CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 247 11 You may click No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click on Yes The following message box displays G End to End Path may be incomplete if the ring is open Open rings will have cross connects on the high speed i or parent ring 12 Click on OK then click Cancel in the End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The following screen shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path 2000 2 GUI 003 3 DDM 2000 DC 3 811 1 2 Enter an STS 3C Three Node Interworking End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 12 only Procedure 1 From the End to End Path menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available to select unsupported signal rates and path types for your current subnetwork are grayed out Click on the STS3C and 3 Node Intwk tabs NOTE In order for the STS 3C path type to be available the following restrictions must be followed 248 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Alow speed slot in Add Drop Primary and Secondary nodes must contain a 21 type OLIU circuit pack The OC 3 Lines application parameter in the Provision menu must be set to for the Ad
192. ed If you specify a file name already in use the existing file 15 overwritten Click on Cancel to cancel the entire operation Click on OK to perform the backup NOTE If you are connected to the NE being backed up via MML the extension appended to the backup file is brm standing for backup restore MML If you are connected to the NE being backed up via TL1 the extension appended to the backup file is brt standing for back restore TL 1 3 The following screen displays Tou have elected to BACKUP this network element Due to the extensive number of commands that must be executed to complete this request it will take fram 5 ta 15 minutes complete this command Do vau want to continue 72 The Edit Menu 4 Click on Yes to perform the backup Click on No to cancel the backup 5 The following summary report appears when the backup has been successfully completed CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 gt Backup Report CPro 2000 Backup Summary Report for 003 7 DDM 2000 3 R11 1 september 20 1999 a 14 13 Backup Result backup commands failed to execute 4 6 Click on Close The following screen displays 2000 RB 2 GUI 7 Click on OK Your backup file is now created A typical backup file contains information similar to the following NOTE The contents of a backup file varies depending on the type and release of NE and its equipage This following 15 just a sample of what a
193. ed Slot CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 3 Select the low speed slot for the secondary node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen is correct Click on OK The following screen appears Choose the Tributary 8 123 2 123 3 2123 12 4 istsd 1e 5 stz3 1e b stz3 le 7 stz3 1e 8 stz3 1e 9 sts3 1e 10 sts3 1le 11 sts3 le 12 sts3 1le 13 ctet 715 4 Select the tributary that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid tributary numbers are displayed Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected Enter End To End Path gt Secondary Node OC48 1 Selected Low Speed Is 2b Tributary sts3 1e 1 5 You are prompted to choose the primary node Double click on the desired node The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 255 Choose the Low Speed Slot 6 Select the low speed slot for the primary node Click on OK The main end to end path form appears Enter End To End Path AMAY 3 Inbwk 4 Intwk Secondary Node OC48 1 Selected Low Speed 12 20 Tributary sts3 1e 1 Primary Mode OC 48 4 Selected Low Speed Is 2a 7 You prompted to choose the drop node Double click on the desired node The following scr
194. ed contained in the partition The following is an example of a DDM 2000 OC 3 ring partition icon a ML 1 If the partition contains an unsupported NE 1 release not included under the section titled Supported Network Elements in the Introduction chapter the partition icon displays with Unsupported Partition The following is an example of an unsupported partition icon nsupported Partition Es 1 m NOTE Although CPro can discover unsupported NEs their presence restricts CPro functionality For example the End to End Path pull down menu 15 disabled when the Subnetwork View contains an unsupported partition End to end paths cannot be created in a partition containing an unsupported NE You can display the expanded version of a supported partition by double clicking on the partition icon or by using the right mouse button pop up menu in the Subnetwork View The expanded version shows each NE in the partition including its Target Identifier TID and connectivity to its neighbor nodes as shown in the example below The node which 1s currently selected 15 highlighted in magenta NS acr ee at em 5 If an unsupported partition 1s opened the NE icon displays with Unsupported Type and the TID appears beneath The following is an example CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Partition Map By placing a check mark next to Partition Map in the Log
195. een appears 256 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Choose the Low Speed Slot 8 Select the low speed slot for the drop node Click on OK The main end to end path form appears Enter End To End Path AWAY 3 Made Inbwk 4 Intwk 45 2 Secondary Node 48 1 Selected Low Speed 12 20 Tributary sts3 1e 1 Primary Mode OC 48 4 Selected Low Speed Is 2a 9 If the information you have selected is correct click on OK to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Enter End T o End Path Ea e Caution Execution of this command may affect service you want continue CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 257 10 Click on No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click on Yes The following message box displays Enter End To End Path 11 Click on OK then click Cancel in the End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The following screen shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path 258 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Enter STS 3 Two way Three Node Interworking End to End Path FT 2000 OC 48 only Procedure 1 From the End to End Path menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types ar
196. elease 6 2 The DEFAULT SCR file displays as shown below Edit the settings in this script so it is consistent with the settings you listed in the CPRO INI file Make sure that the COM PORT designated in the settings line is correct for your PC settings ecomli9600 n 9 1 mone connect if connect fail user msg The connection attempt to the comport failed exit pause 500 pause 500 end CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Installation 19 20 elnstallation CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 CPro 2000 Startup Overview CPro 2000 18 a user friendly tool for craft provisioning of SONET subnetworks This is accomplished by establishing a connection to an NE known as the local node in a SONET subnetwork and communicating to the rest of the subnetwork through this NE over the data communications channel DCC between all NEs in the subnetwork NOTE To access the NE connected to CPro 2000 you must have a user login and password on the NE If you do not have a user login on the NE connected to CPro 2000 see your network administrator Physical Connections OC 3 OC 12 and FT NEs have three ports to which CPro can connect The DCE CIT1 is used for direct connect The DTE CIT2 is used for modem access or direct connect through null modem The X 25 port is used for X 25 access an X 25 protocol device such as a packet assembler disassembler PAD or packet switched network is required
197. element GNE DDM 2000 only alarm GNE AGNE alarm group ALMGRP X 25 packet size X25ps type of cross connection protocol and data communications channel DCC Provision Set Feat Displays or modifies performance monitoring parameters for DDM 2000 NEs Provision Set CID Secu Displays or modifies the current settings for DCE DTE Set CID DCE and Set CID DTE parameters for FT 2000 OC 48 NEs 52 Task Mapping CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Menu Item Keyboard shortcut Provision Update NE Updates the system database on the NE to reflect the existing hardware configuration and incoming signals Provision OSI Stack Retrieves current or sets new values for the OSI Layer 3 Layer 4 Stack Update Inventory Network Retrieves the equipage and cross connections of Element View the current NE and updates the Network Element Ctrl I View database Update X Conn Retrieves the cross connections of the current NE Ctrl S and updates the Network Element View database Update Alarm Updates and displays the alarm status on the GUI status bar for the current NE Update Active Users Retrieves and displays information about users who are logged into an NE via MML Update Map Retrieves the partition topology from all nodes in the current partition Subnetwork View only Update Inventory Subnetwork Retrieves the partition topology equipage and View cross connections from the current partition Subnetwork View only
198. elementis There are no paths im this partition Dangling cross connections in this Partition Network Element OC3 6 DDM 2000 3 11 1 2 There are HO cross connections at this network element Network Element OC3 7 DDMI 2000 3 11 1 2 5751 CROSS CONNECTIONS VT1 5 CROSS CONNECTIONS Rm m 4 92 The Report Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connections Purpose When chosen from the Subnetwork View the cross connections report shows the cross connections for all NEs in the partition that have been inventoried When chosen from a Network Element View this report shows the cross connections for that NE only As described in Report Screen Functions earlier in this chapter you can perform a variety of tasks on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report Procedure 1 From the Report pull down menu select Cross Connections A report similar to the following appears ak amp Cross Connection Report CPro 2000 Cross Connections Report september 20 1999 16 39 For Partition P 1 Thie partition contams 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 network elements Network Element 003 6 DDM 2000 OC 3 R11 1 2 There are cross connections at this network element Network Element 003 7 DDM 2000 3 R11 1 2 STS1 CROSS CONNECTIONS There are STS cross commections at this retarork element T1 5 CROSS CONNECTIONS m es
199. els critical major and minor These WAV files are referenced in the CPRO INI file You can substitute your own WAV files by editing the CPRO INI file using the Notepad editor Procedure 1 Tochange the audible alarm status in a network do one of the following From the Alarms menu select Audible Alarms or e Click the Audible Alarm button located in the lower right corner of the screen The feature 15 enabled if a check mark is visible against the Audible Alarms option and if the Audible Alarms button is pushed in Acknowledging an Alarm When an alarm condition is detected in the network the system sounds the appropriate audible alarm for that alarm level and displays the Network Alarm Detected on dialog box The title bar of this dialog box identifies the detected alarm level For example if a minor alarm 15 detected in the network the name of the dialog box 15 MINOR Network Alarm Detected on Network alarms are classified as minor major or critical To acknowledge an alarm When an alarm is detected the NE a dialog box similar to the following appears Network Alarm Detected on TID f 2345670901 23455 7830 Title Bar displays the level of the alarm detected TID identifies the name of the network Click the Silence button or press the space bar to acknowledge the alarm and dismiss the dialog box 290 The Alarms Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Pager Purpose
200. ement View only Task Mapping 51 Menu Item Keyboard shortcut Report Protection State Displays a report that shows the protection switching state for the current node in FT 2000 OC 48 Network Element View only Report Port Slot Options Provides a list in the Report Viewer of the current DS1 DS3 NCT 2 OC 1 OC 3 OC 12 and LS port line slot options for the current node in the Network Element View Not all of these options are available for every NE type or release X Conns Enter Individual Provides steps for creating individual or ranges of Range cross connections X Conns Delete Individual Provides steps for deleting individual or ranges of Range cross connections Provision DS Ports Retrieves current or sets new Port Line Options for DS1 DS3 NCT 2 OC 1 OC 3 12 OC 48 and LS Not all of these options are available for every NE type or release Provision T1 Ports Provision DS3 Ports Provision EC Ports Provision NCT 2 Lines Provision OC 1 Lines Provision OC 3 Lines Provision OC 12 Lines Provision OC 48 Lines Provision Set NPPA Displays or sets the value for the Protection Access State for 2000 48 NEs Provision Set Date Displays or modifies the current date or time of the NE Provision Set NE Sets options for the current NE including some or all of the following access identifier AID TID Node ID Directory Services assignment of gateway network
201. en that contains the value all then the Get Value button is not available because it applies to more than one set of port provisioning parameters To update values use the down arrow lists at each text box and choose the appropriate values for each option Click on Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click on Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made Provisioning T1 Port Options FiberReach only 160 The Provision Menu Procedure From the Provision pull down menu select T1 Ports The following dialog box displays T1 Port Provisioning Address Line Ending Current Value Alarm Level Current Value AIS Current Value Failure Threshold Current Value to LOS Current Value Stale Current Value PH Mode Current Value Format Current Value Set Value Close Choose a port address by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the port address box A list of all T1 port addresses for the current node is displayed Choose one Once a port address is chosen click on Get Value to see how the port is currently provisioned If a port address 1s chosen that contains the value all then the Get Value button is not available because it applies to more than one set of port provisioning parameters To update values use the down arrow lists at each text box and choose the
202. eports it has detected an unknown error while moving data during 304 CPro 2000 Timeout during SLC 2000 304 CPro 2000 Timeout during Large Subnetwork Inventory 305 Application Error with colors display set to 64 001 1 305 TR EUR noH 305 NE Reset During Restore Operation 305 Restoring ATTR ENV parameter 305 Restoring ASGNMT parameter nennen nennen nnne 305 SROF during FT 2000 ene nennen 305 Restore Exits Can t Delete Cross 5 306 Differential Restore will fail under Microsoft Windows 95 306 sc ES 306 2way Cross Connections Reported as 2 1 306 GUVA UDa E 306 Cross Connection Lines ___ _ 306 tastes 307 Unequipped slots shown in DDM 2000 OC 12 Network Element View 307 DDM TL1 with PAD Commands Appear 1 307 Show all cross connections may be lengthy 307 Te 2000 307 FT 2000 Overlapping Cross Co
203. epresenting the cross connections are not being displayed Red STS 1 Grid cell that 1s selected and opened at the VT level DDM 2000 OC 3 with 24G U OLIU Yellow Signifies non preemptible NPPA status FT 2000 ASCII User Interface AUI The ASCII User Interface referred to throughout this document as the AUI provides access to an NE in the same way that an ASCII terminal provides access The user can type commands into the ASCII user interface and receive an immediate response from the NE This section concentrates on how to use the AUI in conjunction with the GUI although the AUI can be used as a stand alone terminal emulator as well NOTE A network element cannot talk to the AUI unless the AUI initiates contact No autonomous messages from a network element are acted upon by CPro 2000 CPro 2000 uses the AUI to establish communications with the network elements AII commands initiated through the GUI cause information to be sent to and received from the NE This information 15 always visible in the AUI Multiple communication sessions can be running within a single instance of the AUI program This 15 called a Multiple Document Interface MDI and 15 similar to how other Windows programs operate For CPro 2000 this means that two sessions can use only one AUI program but have two open window sessions Sessions are differentiated by names in the title bar of the child window in AUI they are named Defaultl Default 2 and
204. er Manual Release 6 2 Appendix DDM 2000 OC 3 Commands DDM 2000 OC 3 User Service Manual Command Set Purpose The purpose of this section is to provide a cross reference between the Commands and Reports section of Issue 5 of the Lucent Technologies DDM 2000 OC 3 User Service Manual and the menu items of CPro 2000 The Commands Cross Reference Table DDM 2000 OC 3 commands reports that do not have an entry in the CPro 2000 Menu column are not supported in CPro 2000 However please keep in mind that since CPro 2000 allows concurrent access to both the GUI and AUI you can always enter the commands that are not supported on the CPro 2000 menus from the AUI window CIT Command Description CPro 2000 Menu Item CNVT CRS ConvetCros Connectin CPY PROG Copy Program DLT ASNE Delete Alarm Services NE DLT CRS STS1 Delete Cross Connection STS 1 X Conn Network Element Delete DLT CRS VTI Delete Cross Connection VT1 5 X Conn Network Delete DLT TADRMAP Delete TID Address MAP ENT CRS STS1 Enter Cross Connection STS 1 X Network Element Enter CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix A DDM 2000 OC 3 Commands 315 CIT Command Description CPro 2000 Menu Item ENT CRS VT1 Enter Cross Connection 5 X Conn Network Element Enter ENT ULSDCC Enter Upper Layer Section DCC Initialize Performance Monitoring INIT SYS Initialize System INS PROG Install Program
205. erspersed with the autonomous messages from the NE When set to 0 autonomous messages will not be displayed and an interactive session via the AUI will be unaffected by autonomous messages DEFAULT SCR File The DEFAULT SCR file is a default data communications script file provided with the CPro 2000 software It is recommended that this file be used when making a direct connection to the NE See the Accessing the Subnetwork section in the CPro 2000 Startup chapter for more information on connecting to the NE through the GUI This script can be customized with the settings you need to connect to the NEs The settings in the DEFAULT SCR file supersede the settings in the CPRO INI file If needed update the DEFAULT SCR file following CPro 2000 software installation See Appendix D Script and Batch Files for further information on how to customize a script file Customizing the DEFAULT SCR File Open the DEFAULT SCR file through the Windows Notepad editor by doing one of the following e Open the Notepad editor From the File menu in the Notepad application workspace select Open and navigate to the DEFAULT SCR file If you accepted the default during installation CPro 2000 will be in C progra 1 cpror6 2 Note that you may need to change the File name field to scr and the Files of type field to Files OR Select Modify Scrip File from the Edit menu in the CPro 2000 AUI Notepad automatically opens CPro 2000 User Manual R
206. ese TIDs may appear in the Node Manager and the TID drop down list in the login box Upon selection of an invalid TID CPro 2000 will return a message of Unknown TID to the user Login Password Dialog Box Given Unnecessarily When the user tries to access a remote network element in the subnetwork the following message may be displayed RNBY Remote Network Element Busy This means that the remote network element has the maximum number of users CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Partitioning currently logged in CPro 2000 follows this message with a remote node login box At this point the user should click on the Cancel button It will be necessary for the user to wait for the remote node to become available in order to access it with CPro 2000 When the user tries to access a network element in the subnetwork which cannot be accessed due to far end communication failure CPro 2000 will give the message Status Requested Operation Failed followed by a Login Password box Changing the values in the Login Password box will not give access to the remote network element Workaround The user should choose Cancel from the Login Password box to proceed with CPro 2000 to find and clear the communication failure Error with Login to SLC 2000 Occasionally when CPro 2000 is used to log into the OC 3 arm of an SLC 2000 CPro 2000 returns an error when attempting to login This seems to occur when there is residual data in the
207. etwork Purpose To save a subnetwork s information to a file so that you can restart your next CPro 2000 session using the current subnetwork s information This command should be used when you already have a file for this subnetwork s information and you want to update the file Procedure 1 From the Access pull down menu select Save Subnetwork The current subnetwork information is saved to the existing subnetwork file Save Subnetwork As Purpose To save a subnetwork s information to a file so that you can restart your next CPro 2000 session using the current subnetwork s information This command should be used when you are saving a subnetwork s information for the first time or if you want to save the subnetwork s information to a file name that is different from an existing file name Procedure 1 From the Access pull down menu select Save Subnetwork As The following screen appears 62 The Access Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Select File for Saving Subnetwork Ed File Folders Cancel amp y 1 EJ cprorb 2 Help Hetwork felt Save file as type Drives Subnetwork Files nw Em 2 Type in anew file name or choose one of the other existing file names NOTE If you choose an existing file name the file will be overwritten 3 Click on OK or click on Cancel if you do not want to save this subnetwork s information to a file You ar
208. f a particular TL1 command that is not supported in the CPro 2000 menu it 1s assumed that the user will enter such commands directly from the AUI window TOP Number Description Supported by CPro 2000 Circuit Order NTP 010 NTP 011 ____ __ ____ Operation NTP 003 NTP 004 Detailed Level DLP 517 DLP 522 DLP 536 Enter Delete Edit STS 3 Cross Connections at Network Element for 2 Fiber Ring Network 328 Appendix FT 2000 OC 48 TL1 Commands CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix D Script and Batch Files Overview CPro 2000 supports user created files These files known in CPro 2000 as script and batch files are created using the same set of command statements These are described in the following section Supported Statements Although script and batch files are essentially similar CPro 2000 differentiates between them as follows e Script files may be used effectively with CPro 2000 for the initial connection to the subnetwork e Batch files are used to execute a series of commands without the need for user input Script and batch files may be run from the AUI under the Run Script menu or from the GUI under the Access Run Batch Commands menu See the sections titled Script Files and Batch Files later in this chapter for a description of how these two types of user created files can be used effectively with CPro 2000 NOTE The following rules apply to script and batch files C
209. for an Existing STS 3 or STS 1 Cross Connection FT 2000 OC 48 only Procedure 1 Double click on the cross connection line whose LocA and or LocZ are to be changed NOTE When two way or overlapping multiple cross connections exist the following screen appears first 146 CrossConnections 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Select the appropriate Cross Connection gt Please select the appropriate Cross Connection you wish to act on C from to stz3 le 7 2 Select the desired cross connection by clicking on the appropriate box Click on OK 3 The following dialog box displays Change Loca amp Locz F 1 Src_Aid sts3 le 7 Deck Aid ls la Type neway Current Loc F7 1 Current LocZ F7 1 Select New Loca Select New Loc 5 Audit On NOTE When Audit On is chosen an alarm is activated to notify the user of any signal problem See Audit On Option earlier in this chapter To change either setting double click on the cross connection in the NE view to display the Change Loca amp Locz dialog box Either feature can be toggled on off from here by clicking on its box to insert remove the checkmark prior to clicking on OK 4 Depending on the cross connection type the dialog box displays one of the following For a drop cross connection meaning that the cross connection s source AID 15 in a tributary and the destination AID is in a slot the dialog box appea
210. ftware 2000 from your computer Please wait while each of the following components removed Shared program files Standard program files Folder itera Program folders Program directories Program registry entries Uninstall successfully completed 4 Click OK to exit the Remove Programs From Your Computer window 5 Exit any open dialog boxes CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Installation 15 Customizing CPro 2000 Settings CPRO INI File The CPRO INI file 15 created in the installation directory when CPro 15 installed This file contains selectable parameters for configuring the manner in which CPro will operate during an active session The CPRO INI file can be customized for your computing environment after installing the CPro 2000 software NOTE Changes to the CPro session will take effect only when CPro has been restarted after changes have been made to the CPRO INI file Customizing the CPRO INI File The CPRO INI file contains the CPro 2000 default settings To access this file do the following From the Start button select Programs Click on CPro 2000 R6 2 in the submenu that appears then click on CPRO INI in the next submenu The CPRO INI file appears in a Windows Notepad editor window Each of the entries in this file can be customized for your environment They include the following FILENAME This section contains the def
211. he Update Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Window Menu Overview The Window menu allows the user to have a more flexible environment in which to use CPro 2000 This menu gives the user the capability of changing how the information 15 presented on the screen The Window menu commands include the following features e Cascade Tile Horizontal Tile Vertical e Arrange Icons e the ability to toggle between all open or iconified windows CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Window Menu e 179 Cascade Purpose To display the open windows on the CPro 2000 GUI in a cascade format Procedure 1 From the Window pull down menu select Cascade The open windows are displayed as shown in the following screen CPro 2000 6 2 GUI S C FT3 5151 FT 2000 OC 48 R7 2 Access Edit View Repot Provision Update Window Connes Alarms Help Subnetwork View 5 5 5151 2000 0C 48 7_2 F 1 501 5151 FT 2000 0 48 R7 2 180 Window Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Tile Horizontal Purpose To display the open windows on the CPro 2000 GUI in a horizontal format Procedure 1 From the Window pull down menu select Tile Horizontal The open windows are displayed as shown in the following screen 2000 2 GUI Subnetwork View OF Access Edt View EndToEndPath Update Window Alarms Help amp lae 9 5 5151 F
212. he addresses shown in the screen are incorrect Select the two way cross connection icon from the left hand side of the toolbar Click on OK and the following screen appears Confirm Cross Connection Enter Enter Twoway From Caution Execution of this command may affect service Ces Click on Yes if you want to establish the cross connection Click on No if you do not want to establish this cross connection Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation The cross connection appears on the Network Element View as shown in the following sample Cross Connections 113 SNCOCIZEE DDM20000Ci2R5 0 7 5 roe 14 ma i rite river il pial Enter Single 0x1 STS 1 Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 9 X 11 X and OC 12 only Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click on the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection NOTE The following restrictions must be followed to create a single cross connection e One address in the cross connection must be a main and one address must be low speed slot For DDM 2000 OC 3 The low speed slots must contain a single 27 type OLIU or BBG19 circuit pack If both slot pairs are eqiupped one must be set to IS and must be set to NMON For DDM 2000 OC 12 The low speed slot must contain only o
213. he toolbar on the CPro 2000 GUI The Show and Hide X Conn commands enable a CPro 2000 user to either display or hide cross connections in the Network Element View The Subnetwork View opens a window to display the Subnetwork View The Report Viewer provides the ability to read and print previously saved reports See The Report Menu chapter for information on how to save a report to a file Purpose To display or hide for more room on the screen the status bar that contains the alarm status an information window and trash can icon at the bottom of the CPro 2000 GUI window Procedure From the View pull down menu select Status Bar If Status Bar is shown with a check mark then the status bar is displayed on the GUI If no check mark is shown with the Status Bar command the status bar 15 not displayed CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The View Menu 83 Toolbar Purpose To display or hide for more room on the screen the toolbar which contains shortcut icons for several CPro 2000 menu items at the top of the CPro 2000 GUI window Procedure From the View pull down menu select Toolbar If Toolbar is shown with a check mark then the toolbar is displayed on the GUI If no check mark is shown with the Toolbar command the toolbar is not displayed Show X Conn Purpose To display cross connections in a Network Element View Procedure 1 Inthe View pull down menu click on Show X Conn A drop down menu appear
214. iate Modem Type from the down arrow list 9 Click on OK to exit the Communications Options dialog box Selecting Communications Options from the AUI Procedure 1 Start CPro 2000 and click anywhere the AUI window to highlight it give it the focus 2 From AUI Communications menu access modify the communications settings described in the previous section Selecting Communications Options from the GUI NOTE There are two options in the AUI Communications gt Settings menu Modify and From File If you choose the Modify option the default communications settings appear and you can view or configure the settings for your environment These settings can then be saved to a file using the Save command in the AUI File menu If you choose the From File option a list of all previously saved settings files 15 displayed Note however that only files saved to the CPro 2000 R6 2 folder are displayed Select the desired file Connecting to an NE CPro 200 also offers three ways to connect to an NE i Connecting to an NE Using a Login Script Use this type of connection when the PC running CPro 2000 1s directly connected to the CIT port of an NE Each NE has two CIT ports one for data communications equipment DCE port in front and one for data terminal equipment DTE port in back If you are using the DCE CIT port for access the PC can be directly connected If you are using the DTE CIT port for access a null modem must be used
215. ice Hides or shows the status bar at the bottom of the GUI showing the alarm status View Toolbar Hides or shows the toolbar at the top of the GUI an fe Shift F8 Network Element View Element View View Subnetwork View Opens a window displaying the Subnetwork View View Report Viewer F12 Report Path Report Timeslot Usage Report Cross Connections Report Map Report Alarms Report History Report Equipment CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Enables a previously saved report to be viewed or printed Creates report in the Report Viewer that contains information about the complete and incomplete paths in the subnetwork Subnetwork View only Creates a report in the Report Viewer that shows which time slots are being used NEs in the subnetwork Subnetwork View only Creates report in the Report Viewer that shows the cross connections in a single NE from a Network Element View or for all inventoried NEs in a subnetwork from the Subnetwork View Displays a report in the Report Viewer that contains connectivity information in relation to the current node Network Element View only Displays an alarm summary in the Report Viewer for the current node in the Network Element View Displays a history of events in the Report Viewer for the current node in the Network Element View MML only Displays a report in the Report Viewer that shows the equipage for the current node Network El
216. id Port Response see the CPro 2000 Software Release Description that accompanies this user manual for details 6 If you selected Partition Map or Partition Inventory from the Login window CPro 2000 automatically logs into each of the NEs in the subnetwork using the user ID and password entered into the Login window NOTE The following Login window may appear if one of the NEs in the subnetwork uses a different user ID or password other than the local node 7 window appears type in the correct user ID and password Click on OK p pp sii UserlD Password Cancel 9 The GUI window appears containing the appropriate Subnetwork View Network Element Views for the type of NEs in the subnetwork CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Access Menu 59 NOTE To view examples of typical subnetwork and representations see GUI Representations in The User Interfaces chapter Open Subnetwork Purpose To access a subnetwork that has had its subnetwork information saved to a file during a previous CPro 2000 session the information that CPro 2000 queries during a session such as NE equipage cross connections and neighbor information can be saved to a file When you access the subnetwork using the file CPro 2000 does not have to requery the NEs in the subnetwork It uses the information saved in the file This command 15 only available when no connection to a subnetwork is currently
217. iew You may decide not to display the Subnetwork View if you only intend to make provisioning changes to the local node In that case you would not choose Partition Map or Partition Inventory NOTE Only one user should operate on a subnetwork at one time Once the Partition Inventory is performed by that one user the best way to ensure that the inventory stays accurate until that user terminates CPro 2000 is to administratively prohibit a second user on the same subnetwork Contents of the Partition Inventory During a Partition Inventory CPro 2000 retrieves information about all of the nodes in the partition including topology equipage cross connections and alarms Partition Topology The Lucent Technologies SONET NEs provide a capability for each to identify those NEs that are directly connected to it neighbors those NEs in the ring and those NEs in the network This information is essential for all subnetwork level operations such as end to end provisioning of paths Equipage The Partition Inventory queries the NEs to determine how each slot is equipped CPro 2000 displays this information graphically and uses it for commands related to port provisioning and cross connections Cross Connections The Partition Inventory also determines what cross connections exist within the NEs at STS 1 STS 3 and VT1 5 levels including DS1 053 1 OC 1 and OC 3 termination points These cross connections display graphically
218. in dialog box it is possible to perform a Partition Map operation when appropriate rather than undertaking the more comprehensive Partition Inventory The Partition Map operation allows the user to retrieve the partition topology from all nodes in the current partition and display this information in the Subnetwork View Performing a Partition Map 15 sufficient for displaying connectivity information of the NE nodes in a discovered ring However for performing subnetwork level tasks such as creating or deleting an end to end path performing a Partition Inventory is essential Starting CPro 2000 Procedure To start CPro 2000 From the Start button click on CPro 2000 and then select the Graphical User Interface GUI Note that the AUI 15 automatically opened when you open the GUI Accessing the Subnetwork With CPro 2000 configuring data communications to access the subnetwork 15 very flexible since it 1s limited only by the available facilities It is a two stage process that requires you to select your communications options first before connecting to an NE You can select your communications options from either the GUI or the AUI Selecting Communications Options from the GUI Procedure 1 Start CPro 2000 and from the GUI Access menu choose New Subnetwork The Login dialog box displays 2 Inthe Login dialog box highlight DEFAULT SCR at the bottom and delete it NOTE The communication settings specified in the default
219. information on how to use these commands The Run Menu provides a way to run script files without accessing the CPro 2000 GUI This menu also provides scripts to do system and shelf turnups The shelf and system turnup scripts must be specially ordered from Lucent Technologies and are customized for your location Please contact 1 800 WE2 CARE for more information CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The User Interfaces 45 NOTE Any settings found login script a batch file override settings provided in the AUI whether by user entry or a settings file Printing Reports and Windows 46 The User Interfaces CPro 2000 has the capability of printing reports and some windows directly from the GUI reports that be viewed through the Report Viewer such as the reports created using the Reports menu can be printed to your local printer See Report Viewer in the View Menu chapter for additional details The Subnetwork View may be printed using the Print command in the Access menu or the Print toolbar icon See Print Window in the Access Menu chapter for additional details Other GUI windows and AUI information such as a Network Element View or a captured AUI screen may be printed using Microsoft Paint M or the Notepad editor See the following section Printing AUI Screens for instructions on how to capture information in the AUI and print it to your local printer See Printing Windows later in this chapter
220. ing OC 3 Line 157 Provisioning 48 Line Options 2000 48 R7 1 and 7 2 only 158 Provisioning DS1 Port Options DDM 2000 OC 3 159 Provisioning Port Options FiberReach only eese 160 Port O erus FP EU RUD 161 ECL Port TAEA 162 Provisioning LS Port Options FT 2000 48 163 Provisioning OPT Channels OLS 163 Provisioning SUPR Channels OLS 164 Provisioning CMS Ports OLS 165 Set NPPA FT 2000 48 7 1 and 7 2 1 166 MB 166 Vor 167 Set Feat DDM 2000 170 Set CID Secu 2000 48 R7 2 and OLS 170 COI NE E eP 171 Provisioning OSI Parameters OLS 172 The Update Menu 175 aas 175 Inventory ERES EIER TTE 172 NE 176 Alam NE View only
221. ions The Setup Complete dialog box appears at the end of the installation process 5 etup Complete Setup has finished installaing 2000 Hb 2 on your computer Click Finish to complete Setup 18 Click OK in the first Registry Editor window Registry Editor e i Information C Program Files CPraRHBb z cpraaul reg has been successfully entered inta the registry 19 Click OK in the next Registry Editor window to return to the Setup Complete dialog box 14enstallaion GPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Registry Editor d Information in C Program FilessCProRB 2 ole2 reg has been successfully entered inta the registry 20 Click Finish as instructed to complete setup Uninstalling CPro 2000 R6 2 Procedure l From the Start button click CPro 2000 6 2 then select CPro 2000 6 2 Uninstall from the submenu The Confirm File Deletion message appears Confirm File Deletion T 9 Are you sure you want to completely remove 2000 R6 2 and all af its components 2 Click Yes to continue the uninstall or click No to cancel the uninstall 3 If uninstall is successful the Remove Programs From Your Computer window appears NOTE Files created after installation such as Backup files and Pager Log files may not be deleted during the uninstall process To delete these files use the Explorer window Remove Programs From T our Computer uninstall hield will remove the so
222. isplayed in front of any other open windows 184 e The Window Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 End to End Path Menu Overview The End to End Path Menu is available when the cursor is pointing to an unexpanded partition in a Subnetwork View and you press the right mouse button or from the menu bar at the top of the CPro 2000 GUI NOTE End to end paths cannot be created in linear configurations or rings containing an unsupported NE There are many different environments in which end to end paths are commonly created In the simplest situation the traffic originates and terminates within a ring Frequently however traffic 15 routed over a complex multi ring environment CPro 2000 can be used to create and validate several types of end to end paths as well as modify the LocA and or LocZ values in an existing STS 3 or STS 1 path in an FT 2000 OC 48 CPro 2000 supports the following path types two endpoint end to end path including ring transport service across a single ring video service at an STS 3C signal rate in a single ring DDM 2000 OC 12 only locked path at a VT1 5 signal rate in a single ring DDM 2000 OC 3 R9 and later releases and FiberReach only Note that in creating end to end VT cross connects CPro 2000 makes cross connects at every node in the DDM 2000 ring At the two add drop nodes CPro 2000 always makes a VT cross connect However at the through nodes CPro 2000 can make either an STS or
223. l representation of the newly created end to end path Sow icons aHa NSL TR D DDM 2000 FiberReach R2 T7 2 BBFIB 051 Enter STS 1 Two way Ring Transport Service End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 and OC 12 3 mixed ring when OC 3 is equipped with 24G U OLIU NOTE To create a Ring Transport Service path and not a regular two way path the following restrictions must be met Only a DDM 2000 OC 3 ring can be the child ring so the Ring Transport Service path is being created in the DDM 2000 OC 12 ring A low speed slot in the add drop nodes of the parent ring must contain a 21 type OLIU circuit pack The OC 3 line application parameter must be set to Ox for all nodes in the parent ring This is set in the Provision Menu 196 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Procedure 1 From the End to End Path Menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click on the tabs for STS1 signal rate and Twoway Ring Transport Enter End To End Path TwowayZ Hing Transport LA mil gt m Note The RTS Path can contain 0 or 1 Twoways any number of Dual and pairs of p Single 1 valid pair of Single Ox1s is one to the service slot and the other __ protection slot zn 2 Nea
224. lected Low Speed Is 2b CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 281 9 You prompted to choose the secondary node for Ring B Double click on the desired node The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot 10 Select the low speed slot for the Secondary Node in Ring B Click on OK The main end to end path form appears Enter End To End Path 3 Made Inbwk AMAY 3 Made Intwk 4 Hode Intwk Secondary Node Ring OC46 1 Selected Low Speed 1 4 Tributary sts3 1e 8 Primary Mode Ring 2 Selected Low Speed Is 2b 282 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 11 12 13 NON WORONOUUN ee ee Peo 200 2 GL T NEUE gt CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 If the information you have selected is correct click on OK to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Enter End To End Path Click on No if you do not want to create the end to end path of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click on Yes The following message box displays Click on OK then click Cancel in the End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The following screen shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path ixl 9791 2000 _ Ic
225. lete Either press the Delete key on your keyboard or drag the cross connection line to the trashcan icon located in the bottom right hand corner of the GUI 2 The following screen appears asking you to confirm the cross connection deletion Confirm Cross Connection Delete E Delete Twoway From 1 1 m 1 1 1 Caution Execution of this command may affect service 3 Click on Yes and the following screen appears Warming Please Confirm Your Action Are sure You want to delete the Cross Connection between a 1 1 and m 1 1 1 Select Ma to skip deleting this Cross Connection 4 Click on Yes to delete the cross connection NOTE If the cross connection to be deleted is part of an end to end path the following dialog box displays 2000 RB5 2 GUI 9 Would vau like ta DELETE the m 1 1 1 VT1 5 Path Tes Delete the entire m 1 1 1 VT 1 5 End Ta End Path Ma Delete only the selected cross connection but nat the entire m 1 1 1 V T1 5 End To End Path Cancel delete anything Mate Deletion of any part of an End T a End Path will cause the entire path to be removed from the End T a End category and all remaining parts af the path will remain as individual cross connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connections 149 5 Click on Yes to delete the entire end to end path Click on No to delete only the selected cross connection
226. ll if you want to establish the entire range of cross connections in one step Click on No if you do not want to establish this cross connection Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation The cross connections appear on the Network Element View as shown in the following sample 0 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 R3 1 124 e Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Enter Video Source STS 3C Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 12 only Procedure From the Network Element View click on the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The following screen appears when you release the mouse button NOTE When choosing the source and destination slots of the cross connection be sure to use the STS 3 slots that is click on and drag to the larger boxes rather than the smaller STS slots contained within them Cross Connection Properties From gt To mb 4 d NOTE The following restrictions must be followed in order to create a video source cross connection One address in the cross connection must be a main and one address must be a low speed slot The low speed slot must contain a 21 type OLIU circuit pack The STS 3C feature must be enabled This feature is enabled in MML using the SET FEAT command supported by CPro and in TL1 using the ENT FEAT command See your DDM
227. llowing form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click on the tabs for VT1 5 signal rate and Twoway Ring Transport CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 189 Enter End To End Path Twoway Hing Transport Locked Arc gt l Note The 815 Path can contain 0 or 1 Twoways any number of Dual 0 1 and pairs of Single 0 1 valid pair of Single 1 is one to the service slot and the other to protection 210 2 Near the bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose add drop node Double click on the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot 3 Select the low speed slot to be used for this add drop node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen 15 correct click on OK The following screen appears 190 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Choose the Timeslot 4 Select the high speed ring time slot or tributary that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid time slot numbers are displayed Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected Enter End To End Path gt Twoway Ring Transport Locked Arc A mi mZa ml ma
228. lose Path Information v Audit On Source TID 2 Destination 3 List of cross connections TID F6 2 So0urce Aud Is A4a Destination 15 3 12 4 LOCZ F6 ITID F5 3 Source Aid sts3 1w 4 Destination Aid Is 4a ONE WAY uH CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 285 NOTE When the Audit On box is checked the alarm feature that notifies the user of any signal problem is activated To turn off this feature click on the box to remove the check mark gt 286 The End to End Path Menu Select the path you want to update from the List of Path Names field Each path name consists of the source TID and tributary of the path The Path Information box displays all the important information about the path Click on Modify Path and the following dialog box appears indicating that the modifications to LocA and LocZ are complete If at any time you want to cancel this operation click on Close Modify Loca Locz Ei completed 59 Modification to for this End To End Path ts successfully Click on OK CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Alarms Menu Overview The Alarms menu allows you to activate the auto alarm polling feature set parameters for the audible alarms and pager test the pager set up and set other network monitoring preferences Specific activities that you can perform with this feature include enabling dis
229. lot you have chosen 15 correct click on OK The following screen appears 194 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Choose the Timeslot 4 Select the time slot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid time slot numbers are displayed Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected Enter End To End Path Locked Arc 1 5 1 Add Drop Node 1 HS5L FH C Selected Low Speed c 1 1 Tributary m 1 4 2 Choose the Add Drop Node 2 Choose to create the path 5 You are prompted to choose a second add drop node for creating a multi drop path or to create the end to end path When ready to create the path click on OK The following screen appears Enter End To End Path Es e Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want continue CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 195 6 Click on No if you not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click on Yes The following message box displays Enter End T o End Path End to End Path may be incomplete if the ring open Open rings will have connects on the high speed or parent ring 7 Click on OK then click Cancel in the End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The following screen shows a graphica
230. lue OC3 Protection from OCF Current Value OC3 Protection from 48 Current Value Set Value Close 2 Choose a line address or AID by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the line address or AID box A list of all OC 3 line addresses or AIDs for the current node is displayed Choose one 3 Once a line address is chosen click on Get Value to see how the line 15 currently provisioned If a line address or AID is chosen that contains the value all then the Get Value button is not available because it applies to more than one set of line provisioning parameters 4 To update values use down arrow list at each text box and choose the appropriate values for each option 5 Click on Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click on Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made Provisioning OC 48 Line Options FT 2000 48 R7 1 and 7 2 only Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select OC 48 Lines The following Line Provisioning dialog box appears 1 48 Line Provisioning Ei IUS Enter 48 Option Parameters Signal Degrade Threshold Sync Message Current Value Set Value Close 158 The Provision Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 2 Choose a Line AID by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the Line AID box A list of all the OC 48 line AI
231. m will niat be installed Y ou may run the Setup program at a later time ta complete the Installation To continue installing the program click Resume To quit the Setup program click Exit Setup Exit Setup Click Exit Setup to exit the installation or click Resume to accept the terms of the Agreement and to continue the setup process If you accepted the terms of the Agreement the User Information dialog box appears User Information Please enter your name and the name of the company For whom you work Company Lucent Technolagies Back Cancel 11 Enter your name the field the company name in the Company field then press Next The Choose Destination Location dialog box appears CPro 2000UserManualRelease6 2 Istallatione 11 Choose Destination Location Setup will install 2000 2 in the following folder install to this folder click Next To install different folder click Browse and select another folder Tou can choose not to install CPro 2000 2 clicking Cancel to exit Setup Destination Folder C Program Files CPraRB 2 Browse 12 Click Browse to change the directory from the one specified in the Choose Destination Location dialog box then click Next To accept the default directory location click Next The Setup Type dialog box appears Setup Type Click the type of Setup
232. mation you have selected Enter End T o End Path AMAY 3 Tw Av 3 Made Add Drop Node 1 L501 FT3 Selected Low Speed Is 3b Tributary stz3 1e 5 5 You are prompted to choose a second add drop node Double click on the desired node The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 207 Choose the Low Speed Slot 6 Select the low speed slot for this add drop node Click on OK The main end to end path form displays Enter End T o End Path AWAY 3 Made Intel TWAT Twat 3 Mode Intwk awc IT3 Add Drop Node 1 L501 FT3 Selected Low Speed Is 3b Tributary stz3 1e 5 Add Drop Node 2 S C FT3 Selected Low Speed Is 3a 7 Ifthe information you have selected is correct click on to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Enter End To End Path Caution Execution of this command affect service Do you want continue 208 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 8 Click on No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click on Yes The following message box displays 1 End to End Path may be incomplete if the ring is open D pen rings will have cross connects on the high speed 0 parent ririg 9 Click on OK then click Cancel in the End to End
233. ment does not report a priority PRTY value for unequipped slots in FT 2000 R7 2 therefore CPro 2000 does not have any value to return OLS Remote Activity Reporting RAR enabling for CPro 2000 Alarm reporting feature To get complete reporting of alarms with OLS R3 0 the Remote Activity Reporting RAR feature must be enabled on the OLS CPro 2000 does not support the setting of this feature and it can be enabled using CenterLink Management Console software or by issuing the command ENT FECOM Opening the Alarm Preferences dialog box causes illegal operation error When running CPro 2000 under Microsoft Windows 95 Version 4 00 950 or 4 00 950A attempting to open the Alarm Preferences dialog box will cause the following The dialog box fails to appear and clicking in the AUI and the GUI causes the following message to appear stating Program has performed an illegal operation and will be shut down Upgrade to version 4 00 950B or later of Windows 95 Out of Memory Condition In large subnetwork e g 46 NEs after an inventory of all the nodes retrieving equipage provisioning and alarm data an expansion of the partition may result in an out of memory condition The reason for this 15 there may not be enough memory available It is recommended that the virtual memory be set to an amount that 1s at least equal to the amount of real memory BBF5 circuit pack required for Group 3 Shelf If the user 1s logged into a DDM 20
234. mmands by executing one file such as polling the subnetwork twice a day and displaying an NE alarm report at each node Troubleshooting Script and Batch Files The following paragraphs contain useful information for creating and using script or batch files General Problems Although timing problems are the most common users should be aware of other types of script or batch file problems e incorrect port settings login IDs and passwords e syntax problems such as missing brackets around optional command groups and the correct use of the TRANSMITT command For a DDM 2000 if certain commands being sent with the transmitt command end with a semicolon they should not be followed by a carriage return X However this is not true for all DDM 2000 commands or for any FT 2000 commands Timing Problems The most difficult aspect of creating a script or batch file 15 to ensure that there are appropriate PAUSE and WAITFOR commands in the file as described in the following paragraphs The best way to verify that the timing is effective 1s to set up the file and test it Continue to test and make modifications to the timing until the file is correctly established CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix D Script and Batch Files e 339 Command Output If a user is sending a command to an NE and wants to see the NE s response to the command in the AUI a WAITFOR command must follow the TRANSMITT command in the script or batch file Ty
235. mory Two GUI Windows with Focus Occasionally when the windows in the GUI are toggled many times two windows may appear to have the focus It may not be clear to the user which window applies to the menu bar The menu bar will offer the correct operations for one of the windows with focus Workaround The user should close one of the two windows and then re open it Third partition overlays second partition in Subnetwork View With two partitions already displayed in the Subnetwork View if a third partition 1s selected to be shown CPro 2000 may display the third partition icon on top of the second partition icon The user may only see the two icons displayed in the Subnetwork View at this time Workaround Click and drag to reposition the partition icon n the Subnetwork View to view all three partitions Login Rlogin Logout 308 Troubleshooting Invalid Login Password If CPro 2000 1s used in a subnetwork with inconsistent privileged logins at the network elements the user may experience login failures The user provides a login and password when accessing the network with CPro 2000 This login and password pair is used to access each network element in the subnetwork If the login attempt fails due to an invalid login or password the user 15 able to resend a correct login password Extra TIDs in TID list In an OC 48 FT 2000 network element if invalid TIDs are given for the LocA and or LocZ values of a cross connection th
236. n Purpose Set DRI Switch stsl 1e 5 3 Release Close Select the STS3 Tributary address for the DRI switch This is the STS 3 tributary that has the solid line connected to it in the Network Element View of the node 9193 Tributary T Click on Operate to enable the DRI switch Click on Release to reset the DRI switch At any time you may click on Close and your selection is not executed or saved Instead of using the default sequential numbering scheme that CPro 2000 automatically assigns to your partitions you may decide to rename the partitions For example you may decide to give your partition a name that identifies its contents This command is only available from the Subnetwork View and when a partition has the focus Procedure l 80 The Edit Menu From the Edit pull down menu select Rename Partition The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Change Partition Enter new name for the partition 2 in the new name for the partition and click on CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Edit Menu 981 82 The Edit Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 View Menu Overview Status Bar The View Menu contains the following command options e Status Bar Toolbar e Show X Conn e Hide X Conn e Subnetwork View e Report Viewer The Status Bar and Toolbar commands are used to show or hide the status bar and t
237. n CPro 2000 The following table only means that significant steps of the TOPs identified in the following table will be helped by the use of CPro 2000 Wherever the TOP calls for use of a particular craft interface terminal CIT command that is not supported in the CPro 2000 menu it is assumed that the user will enter such commands directly from the AUI window TOP Number Description Supported by CPro 2000 But Not In Service But Not In Service NTP 006 Add New DS Service Group Already In Service NTP 007 Add New DS3 Group for 053 Service System In Service NTP 008 Add New MXRVO Group for DSI Service System In Service OC 3 Path Switched Ring OC 3 Path Switched Ring Network But Not In Service NTP 035 Add New STSIE Low Speed Group for EC 1 Interface System In Service NTP 036 Discontinue EC 1 Interface NTP 038 Convert 051 Group Service to EC 1 Group Service DLP 531 Retrieve Generic Software Version Make VT1 5 DS1 or STS1 DS3 Cross Connections Using CIT Linear or Add Drop Configuration Make VT1 5 DS1 or STS1 DS3 Cross Connections Using CIT Single Ring Configuration Make VT1 5 051 5151 053 Cross Connections Using CIT Dual Ring Interworking Configuration Release 7 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix DDM 2000 OC 3 Commands 319 320 Appendix DDM 2000 3 Commands CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix B DDM 2000 OC 12 Commands DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Man
238. n Yes if you want to establish the cross connection Click on No if you do not want to establish this cross connection Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 4 The cross connection appears the Network Element View as shown in the following sample SNC OCT2 EE DDM 2000 OC 12 65 0 rae d river l NOTE The solid portion of the cross connection points in the direction of the Ring ID 136 Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Enter 1 5 Drop and Continue Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 only Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click on the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The following screen appears when you release the mouse button Cross Connection Properties From gt To m 2 7 1 gt 4 3 NOTE The following restrictions must be followed to create a drop and continue cross connection One address in the cross connection must be a main and one address must be low speed slot The low speed slot being used in the cross connection must contain an STS 1E or OC 3 OLIU circuit pack 2 Click on Cancel if the addresses shown in the screen are incorrect Click on OK and the following screen appears Confirm Cross Connection Enter Enter Drop Continue From m 2 7 1 4 3 Ring Direction m1 Ca
239. n cancel the operation or clear the current information at any time prior to having clicked the OK button Two Endpoint End to End Path Across a Single Ring Setting up a two endpoint end to end path around a single ring using CPro 2000 is accomplished by accessing the End to End Path Menu while in the Subnetwork View NOTE The procedures in this section also apply to paths created in open rings which may only contain one endpoint A form appears prompting the selection of the signal rate and path type The selection of these two options dynamically changes the form to reflect the information needed to create that specific type of path CPro 2000 supports the following types of two endpoint end to end paths across a single ring VTI 5 Two way Ring Transport DDM 2000 3 and 12 3 mixed ring when OC 3 is equipped with 24G U OLIU and FiberReach only VTI 5 Two way DDM 2000 OC 3 FiberReach mixed ring when FiberReach is equipped with 286 0 OLIU in the mains VT1 5 T1 Two way FiberReach only STS 1 Two way Ring Transport DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 and OC 12 OC 3 mixed ring when OC 3 is equipped with 24G U OLIU e STS I Two way Ring Transport DDM 2000 OC 3 FiberReach mixed ring when FiberReach is equipped with 28G U OLIU in the mains STS 3C Two way DDM 2000 OC 12 and 12 3 mixed ring when OC 3 is equipped with 24G U OLIU STS 3 Two way and STS 3 One way 2000 OC 48 only 5 5 Two way
240. n the entry is YES this feature 1s enabled and the appropriate alarm sounds when an alarm is detected When this entry 15 NO this feature 1s disabled no alarm sounds when an alarm 1s detected Installation 17 18 eInstallation CRITICAL identifies the name of the sound X WAV file that 15 associated with a critical alarm MAJOR identifies the name of the sound X WAV file that is associated with a major alarm MINOR identifies the name of the sound X WAV file that is associated with a minor alarm PAGER This section contains information about the state of the pager feature PAGER identifies whether pager feature is enabled or disabled When the entry is YES this feature is enabled When an alarm is detected CPro 2000 searches the data files for the individual s or alphanumeric pager numbers associated with the alarm level then sends a message When this entry is NO this feature is disabled no message 15 sent when an alarm is detected AUTONOMOUS MESSAGES This section contains the entry to determine whether or not autonomous messages generated by the NE are displayed in the CPro 2000 AUI These autonomous messages which keep users up to date with any changing NE conditions may interfere with an interactive session via the AUI DISPLAY can be set to a value of 1 or 0 When set to 1 autonomous messages will be displayed in the CPro AUI and any interactive session messages will be int
241. n this situation CPro 2000 generates an error message in the status bar For more specific details on creating cross connections see the individual procedures in this chapter associated with each of the following cross connection types Oneway FT 2000 only e Twoway Drop amp Continue all DDM 2000 3 and OC 12 supported ring releases DRI FT 2000 only Multi drop FT 2000 only Locked DDM 2000 OC 3 R9 X 11 X and FiberReach only e Dual DDM 2000 OC 3 9 11 and OC 12 only Single DDM 2000 3 9 11 X and OC 12 only Video Source DDM 2000 OC 12 only Video Sink DDM 2000 OC 12 only Hairpin DDM 2000 OC 3 R9 X and 11 X only CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connections 111 Creating Ranges of Cross Connections NOTE CPro 2000 does not support the creation of ranges of cross connections contiguous or noncontiguous for DDM 2000 OC12 FT 2000 OC 48 or DDM 2000 OC 3 equipped with a 24G U OLIU circuit pack In CPro 2000 you can create a range of VT1 5 cross connections in DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach NEs The range of cross connections can consist of a contiguous group of addresses or it can be a noncontiguous group of addresses Tocreate a contiguous range of cross connections press the Shift key while selecting the cross connection source addresses The source addresses would be an unbroken group of addresses such as m 1 1 1
242. nd to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Main There are special cross connections for the parent ring of a DDM 2000 parent ring called dual and single Ox1 cross connections These cross connections only exist in the parent ring never in the child ring A single 0x1 cross connection puts the signal on one rotation in the parent ring A dual Ox1 cross connection puts the signal on both rotations of the parent ring NOTE To create a Ring Transport Service path in a DDM 2000 OC 12 as differentiated from a regular two endpoint path the OC 3 line application parameter must be set to Ox in all of the nodes in the parent ring This parameter is set using the Provisioning Menu There is no special parameter setting in order to create a Ring Transport Service path in a DDM 2000 OC 3 or FT 2000 OC 48 parent ring Enter a VT1 5 Two way Ring Transport Service End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 3 and DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 mixed ring when OC 3 is equipped with 24G U OLIU circuit pack NOTE The following restrictions must be met to create a VT1 5 Ring Transport Service path and not a regular two way path Only the FiberReach ring can be the child ring A low speed slot of the add drop nodes must contain a 27 type OLIU circuit pack Procedure 1 From the Subnetwork View select the End to End Path pull down menu or click on the right mouse button and select End to End from the pop up menu and then select Enter The fo
243. ne 21 type OLIU circuit pack The 3 line application parameter for the function unit used in the cross connection must be set to Ox for TL1 and MML The following screen appears when you release the mouse button 2 Click on Cancel if the addresses shown in the screen are incorrect Click on and the following screen appears d 2 Caution Execution of this command may affect service 3 Click on Yes if you want to establish the cross connection Click on No if you do not want to establish this cross connection Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 4 cross connection appears on the Network Element View as shown in the following sample NOTE A single 0x1 cross connection is shown with a dashed line to differentiate it from the solid line of a 1 1 two way cross connection Pal a 1 n e CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connections 115 Enter Dual 1 STS 1 Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 9 X 11 X and OC 12 only Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click on the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection NOTE The following restrictions must be followed to create a dual Ox1 cross connection e One address in the cross connection must be a main and one address m
244. nect to COMI exit The open 1 and close brackets are used with any command that begins with if The brackets always stand alone on a line as shown above In this case the brackets indicate that execution of the commands between the brackets 1s optional The commands between the brackets are executed only if no connection is made If the connection attempt 1s successful the next command following the brackets 1s executed in this example the end command The command user msg prints a message to the screen indicating to the user that the connection attempt was unsuccessful The text in quotation marks following this command 15 displayed on the GUI window until the user clicks on the OK button in the message box 338 Appendix D Script and Batch Files CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The exit command causes the script file to stop e end This line indicates to CPro 2000 that there are no more lines in the script file to be executed and that the login process can now begin Batch Files Batch files are similar to script files The same commands used in a script file are often found in a batch file but are used in different ways Examples of how batch files are used include the following e installation commands necessary for a technician to do a rapid turn up of a network element including any initialization tasks e agroup of commands that may or may not be supported by CPro 2000 The batch file allows a user to do many co
245. nection appears on the Network Element View as shown in the following sample CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 1 5151 FT 2000 02 48 0 Enter STS 3 1 1 Protected OC 3 Cross Connections FT 2000 OC 48 only Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click on the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The following screen appears when you release the mouse button NOTE The following screens illustrate the process for establishing STS 3 one way 1 1 protected OC 3 cross connection for slot pair 2a 2b Whichever pair of slots you use must be provisioned to be OC 3 1 1 protected through the Provisioning menu before creating this cross connection CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connections 131 Cross Connection Properties Sic AID Dest AID 1 2 gt 3153 1 65 TIDs DSL 123456 76901 23458 Loc 2 Click on Cancel if the AIDs shown the screen are incorrect Select the cross connection type two way at far left hand side of toolbar one way second from left on toolbar or DRI third from left on toolbar Select a Source or Destination TID if available for selection from the down arrow list Click on OK and the following screen appears Contirm Cross Connection Enter Enter Oneway From Iz Za sts3 1Tw 5 Destination TID DSL 123456 78901 23458 Cauti
246. ng groups of commands such as NE initialization commands or NE options not currently supported in the CPro 2000 menu This feature may be used for rapid turnup of new installations using preestablished local standards NOTE See Appendix D Script and Batch Files for information on writing script or batch files Procedure 1 From the Access pull down menu select Run Batch Commands The Select a Script File window appears Select A Script File Ei E4 File name Folders c 5pragra T 2 3 c 71 2 scr default scr scr Help modem scr Hetwork List files of type Script Files 2 Choose the script that you want to execute and click on OK NOTE The script or batch files are customized files set up by the CPro 2000 system administrator Any newly created files should be tested prior to use 68 The Access Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Open Partition Purpose This command expands a selected partition in the Subnetwork View and displays the individual in the partition Procedure 1 Inthe Subnetwork View click on the desired partition icon to be expanded 2 From the Access pull down menu select Open Partition 3 selected partition is expanded and the individual NEs for the partition are displayed Close Partition Purpose This command closes an
247. ng screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 225 Choose the Low Speed Slot 6 Select the low speed slot for this video sink node Click on OK The main end to end path form displays Enter End To End Path 12 mb l mbz mb1 nbz vai OC 1z OC 12 5 mb1 mnbz mb OC 12 2 Video Source OC12 1 Selected Low Speed Tributary mb 1 Video Sink OC12 2 Selected Low Speed 7 You are prompted to choose another video sink node for creating a multi drop path or to create the end to end path When ready to create the path click on OK The following screen appears Enter End To End Path Es Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want to continue 226 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 8 Click on No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click on Yes The following message box displays 1 End End Path may be incomplete if the ring is open D pen rings will have cross connects on the high speed parent ririg 9 Click on OK then click Cancel in the End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The screen below shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path 2000 R6 2 GUI 0 12 2 DDM 2000 OC 12 RH5 1 2 Locked Arc End to End Path
248. nnect Table 186 857 End to End Path Menu 42 95 185 86 193 197 201 214 218 224 228 233 237 239 244 248 254 259 264 65 272 278 284 85 313 Equipment report 101 Error message 59 74 79 85 111 303 332 379 Exit 11 15 19 27 A1 44 45 50 57 61 64 69 298 304 6 331 32 334 35 338 40 Index e 391 FiberReach 5 6 21 22 31 38 40 84 94 103 111 13 117 122 23 135 150 153 156 160 168 185 86 187 89 193 227 28 233 244 310 342 48 379 383 FT 2000 48 6 22 30 39 40 42 51 53 71 79 80 95 96 102 5 112 128 29 131 133 139 141 143 44 146 148 153 55 158 163 166 169 70 185 86 188 89 205 209 10 214 218 237 254 259 264 278 285 288 304 325 328 340 General 5 303 311 313 339 General conventions 2 Graphical User Interface GUI 1 5 25 34 387 GUI navigation 34 H Hairpin cross connections 92 118 Hardware platform 6 Help Menu 42 313 14 Hide X Conn 51 83 84 History report 100 Invalid port response 59 303 5 K Keyboard conventions 3 L Locked Arc end to end paths 227 394 v Login 16 17 21 23 25 27 31 35 46 50 57 61 64 67 74 307 8 316 17 322 23 324 325 328 335 337 339 346 355 Login script 27 Login Rlogin Logout 5 303 311 313 339 Logout 35 50 57 65 67 308 316 321 325 LS port options 163 Map report 98 MegaStar 6 351 357 379 Menu bar 1 36 A1 45 49
249. nnections Information not shown in Status Bar 307 Dotted Cross Connection Lines not Bold eese 308 Opening a Large Amount of NE Windows in the GUI May Cause Problems 308 Two GUI Windows With 308 Third partition overlays second partition in Subnetwork View 308 w Rio d Bo 610 NR RR ORT m 308 gi 308 Exa HDs i0 BIB NIC E 308 Login Password Dialog Box Given 308 Error with Login to 5 2000 309 CUIU C RR 309 Unclear connectivity between partitions in Subnetwork View 309 PPO VIS TOW MENOR ERE 309 Setting status 2000 5 309 LS Port Provisioning on Unequipped LS 5 2 0 0 309 OLS Remote Activity Reporting RAR enabling for CPro 2000 Alarm PORE IER ERECTO D DO D T 310 Contents CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 310 Out of Memory CONG OM TENET 310 BBF5 circuit pack required for Group 3 310 Cursor becomes hourglass when positioned outside of a confirmation box 310 Invalid Subnetwork Configurations Not Supported 310 Invalid Equipage Ne
250. nnels The following dialog box displays Port Provisioning Notification Code Curent Value Signal Degrade Threshold Current Value Set Value Close 2 Choose the AID by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the AID box A list of all the AIDs for the current node is displayed Choose one 164 e The Provision Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 3 AID is selected you can click on Get Value to see how the AID is currently provisioned If a line address is chosen that contains the value all then the Get Value button is not available because it applies to more than one set of line provisioning parameters 4 To update the values use the down arrow list at each text box and select the appropriate values for each parameter 5 Click on Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click on Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made Provisioning CMS Ports OLS only Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select CMS Ports The following dialog box displays CHS Port Provisioning Secondary State Current Value Set Value Close 2 Choose the AID by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the AID box A list of all the AIDs for the current node is displayed Choose one 3 Once an AID is selected you can click on Get Value to
251. nous Optical Network SONET Product Family CPro 2000 mechanizes provisioning operations at the network element NE level as well as at the subnetwork level This manual 15 intended for CPro 2000 users of all experience levels It describes the features of CPro 2000 and offers detailed procedures for all operations The manual is arranged to follow the CPro 2000 main menu bar and associated menu items Intended Audience CPro 2000 is applicable for all operations personnel who administer Lucent Technologies SONET NEs wherever they currently use an American Standard Code for Information Interchange terminal or craft interface terminal CIT Engineering Planners Craft Personnel and Maintenance Personnel Engineering planners craft personnel and maintenance personnel typically use an ASCII terminal that 15 directly connected to the CIT port or X 25 port also known as the operation system interface OSI port of a SONET network element through an RS 232 cable to perform analysis of the subnetwork In this scenario the engineer can use a desktop or laptop personal computer PC running Microsoft Windows to access CPro 2000 The appropriate communications port of the PC running CPro 2000 15 connected to the NE s CIT port in order to operate and analyze the SONET subnetwork CPro 2000 provides the following benefits to engineering planners craft personnel and maintenance personnel subnetwork view vi
252. ns the value all then the Get Value button is not available because it applies to more than one set of port provisioning parameters To update values use the down arrow list at each text box and choose the appropriate values for each option Click on Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click on Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made Provisioning EC1 Port Options Procedure 162 The Provision Menu l From the Provision pull down menu select Ports The following dialog box displays for a DDM 2000 OC 3 or DDM 2000 OC 12 provided that there is at least one STS 1E circuit pack in the current node Port Provisioning Pour 2 Enter EET Option Parameters Port Address Alam Level Current Value Signal Degrade Threshold Current Value State Current Value Set Value Close The following dialog box appears for an FT 2000 EC1 Port Provisioning im i y Enter Option Parameters Alam Severity Current Value B Signal Degrade Threshold Current Value Primary State from 48 ra Current Value Secondary State 5T5X Current Value Set Value Close CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 2 Choose port address or AID by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the port address or AID box A list of all
253. nt located in the Accessories Program Group You can use any Windows based graphics package that accepts input from the Windows clipboard 4 From the Edit pull down menu of Microsoft Paint select Paste A copy of the window appears 5 From the File pull down menu select Print and the window is printed CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The User Interfaces 47 48 The User Interfaces CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Task Mapping How to Accomplish a Task Task Map The best way to accomplish a task that you are unfamiliar with in CPro 2000 18 to find the task in the table below and determine which menu contains the commands you need Each task listed in the table below is described in detail in the next few chapters of this guide The table here and the detailed descriptions in the subsequent chapters are all organized by menus accessible from the menu bar at the top of the GUI window NOTE Creating and deleting cross connections is not performed through a menu These commands are performed using drag and drop technology The X Conns menu contains instructions for how to create and delete cross connections it does not contain a menu of commands For the purposes of this Task Map cross connection activities are listed under X Conns The menu bar at the top of the GUI window contains all of the functionality of CPro 2000 The menus can be accessed by clicking on the appropriate word in the menu bar using the mouse Ea
254. nt Views An MDI consists of one main window that contains multiple subwindows In this case the CPro 2000 GUI window 15 the main MDI window The Subnetwork View and Network Element Views are the subwindows e The Subnetwork View 1s a graphical representation of the subnetwork topology including partitions partition is a logical grouping of NEs interoperating on the same high speed SONET line NOTE For more information on partitioning see the section titled Partitioning in the CPro 2000 Startup chapter A Network Element View is a graphical representation of the cross connections ports slots and tributaries associated with an NE Several Network Element Views can be displayed at once A Network Element View must be active to execute NE level tasks such as establishing cross connections See Subnetwork View and The Network Element View later in this chapter for further details on the components that make up these windows and how they are used GUI Navigation There are several ways to switch the focus of the GUI and navigate between the Subnetwork View and the Network Element Views Menu items change depending on which part of the GUI has the focus CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 e The Node Manager is available from the Access menu and the toolbar Use the Open Close and Switch To commands to switch the focus between the Network Element Views and the Subnetwork View The Node Manager contains other commands such
255. nter End To End Path 11 Click on OK then click Cancel in the End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The following screen shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path T 1 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 263 Four Node Interworking End to End Paths Interoffice Ring Application A form in the CPro 2000 End to End Path menu supports the creation of a four node interworking end to end path which is used for interoffice ring applications To create a four node interworking end to end path access the End to End Path menu while in the Subnetwork View A form appears prompting the selection of the signal rate and path type The selection of these two options dynamically changes the form to reflect the information needed to create that specific type of path There are four types of four node end to end paths supported by CPro 2000 STS 1 four node interworking DDM 2000 e VTI 5 four node interworking DDM 2000 OC 3 Releases 7 2 9 0 11 0 and 11 1 STS 3 two way four node interworking FT 2000 OC 48 Releases 6 0 7 0 7 1 and 2 STS 1 four node 2000 48 Releases 6 0 7 0 7 1 and 7 2 when ring 15 equipped with B5 optics When constructing interoffice rings it is necessary to have exact information on which TID performs which function prior to creating the individual cross connections that make up a fou
256. nued Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Special Conditions X 1 or n 7 7 1 Prov ENT OC3 RTRV OC3 ntfcncde syncmsg oc3frmlgx oc3tolgx sdthr sst Prov sst 12 2 ENT OC12 RTRV OCI2 48 RTRV OC48 SDTHR 12 ntfcncde syncmsg oc12frmlgx ocl12tdir sdthr syncmsg Prov 12 ENT LS RTRV LS PRTY I pu oc1 2tolgx 376 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for OLS with TL 1 Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Special Conditions X System 1 ent sys RTRV SYS new tid std apsd system type sidel sys side2 sys agne dsne alrmgrp x25ps dirn RTRV DAT date time tz stopdst dstz dstz portacc roa ent ne secu RTRV NE SECU alw uid page uout EN set attr alm RTRV ATTR ALM almdel clrdel set attr cont RTRV ATTR CONT conttype ser attr env RTRV ATTR ENV ntfcncde almmsg CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 377 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table OLS with TL1 continued Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Special Conditions Lsetatr SUPR RTRV ATTR SUPR 4 4 2a ent SUPR RTRV SUPR ntfcncde X ____ 221292 __ ent OCHAN RTRV OCHAN pst 04002 00 ini sst ent OTPS RTRV OTPS LSBBRATE ps
257. number is paged NOTE You can associate the same pager user name and pager number with one or more alarms For example a pager user John Doe with a pager number 222 2222 can be associated with both major and critical alarms To do so enter John Doe s name and number twice associating the first entry with major alarms and the second entry with critical alarms The system calls John Doe s pager number only if either major or a critical alarm 15 detected 10 Click OK from within the Call List page to save your entries Viewing the Call List 1 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Click the Call List tab to display the call list 3 Click the Up or Down arrows 24 to view the names in the call list CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Alarms Menu 297 4 To edit the Call List press Edit To add more entries to the list click Add delete the entry click Delete For detailed information on how to perform each of these tasks see the appropriate sections of this chapter Editing call list entries To change any of the parameters associated with a pager user name 1 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Click the Call List tab to display the call list page 3 Click Edit to activate the fields in this window 4 Change parameters as follows A user name th
258. o 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The function definition FUNCTION MY SET NE 5 transmitt set ne dsne 1 agne 2 5 3 4 5 5 CALL WAITING lt Execute gt lt The set ne command had problems gt transmitt y r CALL WAITING lt lt gt lt The set ne command failed gt The function call CALL MY SET NE DSNE Vlaue S AGNE Value S ANY PARA S ANY gt lt 5 PARA The macro calls DSNE Value Enter DSNE Value Yes No No AGNE Value Enter AGNE Value Yes No No ANY PARA Enter the parameter and its value like this TID newtid CAPTURE Command The CAPTURE command provides the ability to capture terminal output to a file The syntax of the CAPTURE command 15 shown below CAPTURE filename where filename 15 any valid file pathname If the filename is OFF then the current capturing if ON is stopped An example is shown below CAPTURE myrep log NOTE If the specified filename already exists the user is asked whether the file should be overwritten Script Files CPro 2000 script files may contain data communications parameters such as PC settings dial up commands and information for connecting to the local node The script file should not include any commands that actually log the user into CPro 2000 The script file should only get the user to the point where the CPro 2000 GUI starts the login process A simple data communications script is provided with CP
259. o be displaced This can be corrected by maximizing the NE view window to full screen size CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 NE Access via the AUI During a CPro 2000 session if the user sends any commands to the network element via the AUI the operation may interfere with CPro 2000 s auto alarm polling At a user defined interval CPro 2000 retrieves the alarm status for the current node If the user 15 interfacing with the network element via the AUI and auto alarm polling activates the user will possibly encounter an error condition It is recommended that access to the network element through the AUI be used sparingly during a CPro 2000 session Unequipped slots are shown in DDM 2000 OC 12 Network Element View In a DDM 2000 OC 12 Network Element View CPro 2000 shows equipped and unequipped low speed slots The unequipped slots are grayed out and unavailable for provisioning and cross connections DDM TL1 with PAD Commands Appear Twice If the user selects TL1 from the Login dialog box local echo is turned on automatically If the user is using a PAD Packet Assembler Disassembler which also has local echo on the commands that are sent to the network element will appear twice To avoid this turn off the local echo under the Communication Terminal Emulation menu in the AUI after the login is complete Show all cross connections may be lengthy In a DDM 2000 3 with many VT1 5 cross connections if Show gt All Cross
260. o create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click on Yes The following message box displays Enter End To End Path G End ta End Path may be incomplete if the ring i open Open rings will have na cross connects on the high speed ac or parent ring 13 Click on OK then click Cancel in the End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The following screen shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path CPro 2000 2 GUI DC3 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 R11 1 2 Access Edt View Report Provision Update Window Connes Alarms Help Aa 7 003 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 611 1 2 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 271 Enter VT1 5 Four Node Interworking End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 3 only Procedure 1 From the End to End Path menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click on the tabs for VT1 5 signal rate and 4 Node Intwk path type Enter End T o End Path Es Locked Arc Twaoway Hing Transport 3 Intwk 2 Atthe bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose the primary node in Ring A Double click on the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot 3 Select the low speed slot for the primary node for Ring A Note that only valid slot addresses are displ
261. o provide a cross reference between the TOP section of Issue 5 of the Lucent Technologies DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual and the menu items of CPro 2000 The Cross Reference Table for Tasks Supported in CPro 2000 The following table provides a cross reference between the CPro 2000 capabilities and the DDM 2000 OC 12 TOPs Not every step in every one of the identified TOPs may be supported in CPro 2000 The following table only means that significant steps of the TOPs identified in the following table will be helped by the use of CPro 2000 Wherever the TOP calls for use of a particular CIT command that is not supported in the CPro 2000 menu it is assumed that the user will enter such commands directly from the AUI window Supported by CPro 2000 Not In Service NTP 005 Add New DS3 Group for 053 Service System In Service NTP 006 Discontinue End to End 053 Service OC 12 Path Switched Ring OC 12 Path Switched Ring Network NTP 023 Establish Initial EC 1 Service NTP 024 Add New STSIE Low Speed Group for EC 1 Interface System In Service NTP 025 Discontinue EC 1 Interface NTP 026 Convert 053 Group Service to 1 Group Service DLP 541 Edit Delete or Enter a User s Login Configuration Interworking Configuration 324 Appendix B DDM 2000 OC 12 Commands CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix C FT 2000 OC 48 TL1 Commands FT 2000 OC 48 User Service Manual Command Set Purpose The purpose of this section is
262. oR62 This will not be seen with Windows 95 or Windows 98 Workaround The user should use the dialog box which comes up once save or capture has been selected to change the directory to C ProgramFiles CProR62 CPro 2000 reports it has detected an unknown error while moving data during installation This error occurs on Windows 95 or 98 and only if the user has run a different version of CPro 2000 and then starts the installation without first rebooting the PC Workaround Reboot the PC before installing CPro 2000 R6 2 CPro 2000 Timeout during SLC 2000 RTRV EQPT Occasionally when the user 15 retrieving a network element inventory for an SLC 2000 CPro 2000 times out The default TIMEOUT value for CPro 2000 is 30 seconds For fully equipped SLC NEs 30 seconds 15 not long enough to retrieve all the equipment information CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Workaround The user should change the TIMEOUT value in the CPRO INI file to 60000 milliseconds 60 seconds The user must exit CPro 2000 and restart for the changes in the CPRO INI file to take effect CPro 2000 Timeout during Large Subnetwork Inventory In large subnetwork greater than 35 network elements CPro 2000 may be unable to perform a NE or Subnetwork Inventory The command response to rtrv map net 15 not received by CPro 2000 in time and the application responds with Invalid Port Response Workaround The user should change the TIMEOUT value in the CPRO I
263. ommand must be completed from an NE in the subnetwork other than the one to which CPro 2000 is connected DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 Access via X 25 Port For DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 the X 25 port 1s always active and once the cable 15 hooked up communication can be established This provides TL1 commands and responses for all the supported TL1 commands If you are not using a packet switched network then a PAD must be used to connect CPro 2000 directly to an X 25 port FT 2000 OC 48 Access via X 25 Port An FT 2000 OC 48 X 25 port is always provisioned for TL1 and cannot be changed If you are not using a packet switched network then a PAD must be used to connect CPro 2000 directly to an X 25 port NOTE FiberReach NEs cannot be accessed directly via TL1 because they do not support an X 25 port TL1 FiberReach access is provided through its DDM 2000 OC 3 host over the DCC See DDM 2000 Access via X 25 Port below for further details CPro 2000 utilizes a concept known as partitioning As the size and complexity of SONET subnetworks continue to grow working with an entire subnetwork can be cumbersome Therefore CPro 2000 partitions subnetwork into logically divided areas that are easier and faster to work with A partition is a logical grouping of NEs all inter operating on the same high speed SONET media For example each group below contains NEs of the same partition each discreet ring within a multi ring environment all
264. ommand to edit add or delete an Tab OK entry in the Call List window O Alarms Preferences Call List Cancels a command to edit add or an delete entry Tab Cancel in the Call List window C Alarms Preferences Pager Test Accepts test messages entered by the user Tab Message to PIN P Alarms Preferences Pager Test Dynamically displays progress of the test Tab Message Text M Alarms Preferences Pager Test Transmits the test message Tab Send S Alarms Preferences Pager Test Removes entries from the Message to PIN field Tab Clear and the Message Text field C Alarms Preferences Pager Test Specifies the pager type Tab Address Type T Help CPro 2000 Help Provides an on line version of the CPro 2000 User Manual CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Task Mapping 55 56 Task Mapping CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Access Menu Overview The Access Menu contains commands that can open close and save subnetworks open and close Network Element Views log into and out of network elements execute batch files and exit CPro 2000 The Access pull down menu contains the following command options New Subnetwork Open Subnetwork Close Subnetwork Save Subnetwork Save Subnetwork As Print Window Close Window Close Windows Login Logout Node Manager Run Batch Commands Open Partition Close Partition Open NE Exit CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Access Menu 57 New
265. ommands are NOT case sensitive ndentations are permitted e There are no special naming conventions for a script or batch file although it is recommended that you append a scr extension to your script file names Special characters such as r which equals a carriage return can be included in the file CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix D Script and Batch Files 329 Supported Statements TRANSMITT string Outputs string at the COM port where string 15 any string of text enclosed between double quotations If transmitting a TL1 command a WAITFOR statement must follow the TRANSMITT string Examples TRANSMITT 1 transmitt rtrv egpt all r waitfor 034 0 DIALNUMBER string Connects to the COM port and dials the given telephone number with pulse or tone mode where string 18 enclosed between double quotations and consists of two parts The first part is either P for Pulse T for Tone mode The second part 15 the phone number which may contain dashes or spaces If an error occurs this command raises the DIALNUMBER FAIL flag Examples DIALNUMBER P 1 908 555 1212 dialnumber 1 909 999 12127 NOTE This command connects to the COM port so do not attempt to connect to the COM port before running this command WAITFOR string Waits for any of a list of tokens from the COM port where string is enclosed between double quotations and contains up to 20 tokens separated by 10 If
266. on and the following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connections 119 Confirm Cross Connection Enter Enter Single 1 From Caution Execution of this command may affect service Cross connect may use an OC 1 line that is in the NHOH state 4 Click on Yes if you want to establish the cross connection Click on No if you do not want to establish this cross connection Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 5 The cross connection appears on the Network Element View as shown in the sample below NOTE A single Ox1 cross connection is shown with a dashed line to differentiate it from the solid line of a 1 1 two way cross connection oNC OC3 D DDM 2000 OC 3 R3 1 Enter Dual Ox1 VT1 5 Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 9 X and 11 X only Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click on the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection NOTE The following restrictions must be followed to create a dual Ox1 cross connection e One address in the cross connection must be a main and one address must be low speed slot e The low speed slot must contain two 27 type OLIU BBG19 circuit packs Both lines must be set to in service 19 120 Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 2 The following screen appears when you release the
267. on Execution of this command may affect service 3 Click on Yes if you want to establish the cross connection Click on No if you do not want to establish this cross connection Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 4 cross connection appears on the Network Element View as shown in the following screen for an OC 3 slot pair 2a and 2b for 1 1 protection 132 Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 051 123456 78901 23458 FT 2000 48 Ab 0 sss TI NOTE The protection X Conns are entered automatically by the NE if the 1 1 provisioning already exists If the 1 1 provisioning is entered after the cross connection is created the NE automatically enters the protection cross connection CPro 2000 displays the protection cross connection the next time the cross connections are updated Enter STS 1 1 1 Protected OC 3 Cross Connections FT 2000 OC 48 Release 7 0 only Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click on the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The following screen appears when you release the mouse button NOTE The following screens illustrate the process for establishing an STS 1 one way 1 1 protected OC 3 cross connection for slot pair 2a 2b Whichever pair of slots you use must be provisioned to be OC 3 1 1 protected through the Provisioning menu before crea
268. onnection must be a main and one address must be low speed slot For DDM 2000 OC 3 the low speed slot must contain a MXRVO circuit pack BBG19 circuit pack or a 2662 0 circuit pack For DDM 2000 1 the low speed slot must contain 51 circuit pack 2 Click on Cancel if the addresses shown in the screen are incorrect Select the Locked cross connection icon from the right hand side of the Cross Connections Properties toolbar single arrow pointing to the left NOTE The Ring Direction for the cross connection 15 specified according to which high speed side is involved when establishing the cross connection ml side vs m2 side 3 Click on OK and the following screen appears Confirm Cross Connection Enter T Enter Locked From To Ring Direction m1 Caution Execution of this command may affect service a omen 4 Click on Yes if you want to establish the cross connection Click on No if you do not want to establish this cross connection Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 122 Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 5 cross connection appears on Network Element View as shown in the following sample NOTE A locked cross connection takes up an entire time slot in the NE although the cross connection does not actually pass through the time slot in both mains As shown in the sample below the time slot m2 7 2 is grayed out even th
269. onnection that is part of the path The Cancel dialog box shows each of these commands as they are issued to the NEs You may press Cancel at any time during this process to cancel the CPro 2000 command This is particularly useful when you are in the middle of a lengthy operation such as a Partition Inventory and you want to halt the command process CAUTION Depending on how quickly you cancel a command some or all of the command may be completed anyway Please check the AUI to see which if any commands have been completed For example in the case of creating or deleting an end to end path a partial set of cross connections may have been created or deleted Use the Cancel button with caution GUI Representations The following screens show examples of the Network Element View and the Subnetwork View in the CPro 2000 GUI The menu bar and toolbar are also included in the displays CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The following is example of a CPro 2000 GUI when the local node is DDM 2000 3 2000 16 2 GUI Subnelwork Vien _ x Subnetwork View The following is an example of a CPro 2000 GUI when the local node is a DDM 2000 OC 3 with 24G U Optical Line Interface Unit OLIU circuit pack in the main tributaries CPro 2000 RB5 2 GUI Subnetwork View Access Edit View EndToEndPath Update Window Alarms Help 2 063 8 DDM 2008 OC 3 R11 1 2 B X View L
270. onnection using drag and drop technology simply select the cross connection line you wish to delete by clicking on it the X cursor appears and drag the cross connection to the trashcan icon appearing at the bottom of the Network Element View You may also click on the cross connection line to select it and then press the Delete key on your keyboard Any cross connection that can be entered via the GUI can be deleted via the GUI NOTE While creating and deleting cross connections you may see that the arrowheads on the end of a cross connection appear to be lying on their side The arrowheads are shown like this when there is not enough space to accommodate the arrowhead pointing straight 112 Cross Connections 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Entering Cross Connections The following sections give detailed procedures on how to accomplish the different tasks associated with entering and deleting cross connections Enter STS 1 Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 and FiberReach R2 2 equipped with 28G U OLIU in the mains Procedure 1 2 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 From the Network Element View click on the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The following screen appears when you release the mouse button Cross Connection Properties From gt To 3 gt mb 9 Click on Cancel if t
271. or sink is not supported CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 223 Procedure 1 From the End to End Path Menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click on the tabs for STS3C signal rate and Video Service Enter End T o End Path 2 Atthe bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose the video source node Double click on the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot 3 Select the low speed slot to be used for this video source node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen is correct click on OK The following screen appears 224 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Choose the Timeslot 4 Select the time slot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid time slot numbers are displayed Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected Enter End To End Path Video Service az Lu 12 mb l mbz mb1 nbz vai OC 1z OC 12 3 me 1 gt mb EISE CH Video Source OC12 1 Selected Low Speed Tributary mb 1 5 You are prompted to choose the video sink node Double click on the desired node The followi
272. ordingly CPro 2000 maintains all information relating to the Update Inventory command in a temporary data location When the Update Inventory command is completed successfully the network element view is redisplayed This menu item is only available from a Network Element View Procedure 1 From the Update pull down menu select Inventory The current NE s inventory is updated and the Network Element View 15 redisplayed CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Update Menu 175 X Conn NE View Purpose To retrieve the NE cross connections and update a Network Element View by displaying the current cross connections CPro 2000 maintains all information relating to the Update X Conn command in a temporary data location When the Update X Conn command is completed successfully the information 1s moved to the data cache and the network element view 15 redisplayed This menu item is only available from a Network Element View Procedure 1 From the Update pull down menu select X Conn If cross connections exist in the current NE the NE View is updated to show the current cross connections Alarm NE View only Purpose To update and display the alarm state for the current network element Procedure 1 From the Update pull down menu select Alarm The current NE s alarm state 15 updated thereby redisplaying the alarm status in the lower left hand corner of the GUI window Active User OC 3 R11 1 only Purpose To
273. ore Cmd Backup Cmd Special Conditions 6 0 7 0 7 1 7 2 4 X Prov 2 RTRV OC12 4 ntfcncde X syncmsg X oc12frmlgx X oc1 2tolgx X oc 1 2tdir X sdthr X X sst Prov 4 ENT OC48 RTRV OC48 SDTHR syncmsg Sync 5 RTRV SYNCN input msg msg oper E oper W clk sts tg2 clk sts X Sync 5 ENT SYNCN RTRV SYNCN syncnmod SRC 1 iof 50451 iof 1 ilc 50451 ilc 4511 equ ds12 equ Alarm SET ATTR ALM RTRV ATTR ALM ALMdel CLRdel TRIBrep gt CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters 371 Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table FT 2000 with TL1 continued ntfcncde X ALMMSG X penes 85 CONTTYPE Alarm RTRV ATTR all SpecCond 640 aidtype X X X locn always NEND X X X ntfcncde X X X Alarm 6 SET ATTR G ntfndde x x Alarm 6 SET ATTR OC3 12 d Alam 6 SET ATTRECI x x Alam 6 SET ATTROCI2 12121 B ENT CRS STS3 RTRV CRS STS3 cct X loca X loca nid locz locz nid extra oc3st pst sst audit 372 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 04
274. ot for the primary node in Ring B Click on OK The main end to end path form appears Enter End To End Path Primary Mode Hing OC3 1 Selected Low Speed 1 1 4 Tributary m 1 1 4 Secondary Node Hing 3 2 9 You are prompted to select the secondary node for Ring B Double click on the desired node The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 275 Choose the Low Speed Slot 10 Select the low speed slot for the secondary node in Ring B Click on OK The main end to end path form appears Enter End To End Path Locked Arc Twaoway Hing Transport 3 Intwk 4 Intwk Primary Mode Hing OC3 1 Selected Low Speed 1 1 4 Tributary m 1 1 4 Secondary Node Ring OC3 2 11 If the information you have selected is correct click on OK to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Enter End To End Path e Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want to continue 276 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 12 Click on No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click on Yes The following message box displays Enter End T o End Path 1 End to End Path may incomplete if the ring is open Open rings will have cross connects on the high speed a o
275. ough it does not contain a cross connection indicating it is not available for cross connection SNC OC3 C DDM 2000 OC 3 R3 1 Enter a Range of VT1 5 Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach only Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click on the source slot of the cross connection e To create a contiguous range such as m 1 1 1 m 1 1 2 m 1 1 3 and so of cross connections hold the Shift key on your keyboard and click on each of the additional slots or click on the last slot the slots in between are automatically chosen in your range To create a noncontiguous range such as 1 1 1 m 1 1 3 m 1 2 1 and so on of cross connections hold down the Control key and click on each of the additional slots in the range 2 Release the Shift or Control key and while holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the last destination slot of the range of cross connections The following screen appears when you release the mouse button CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connections 123 3 Cross Connection Properties From gt To Click on Cancel if the addresses shown in the screen are incorrect Click on OK and the following screen appears Confirm Cross Connection Enter Enter Twoway From m 2 2 1 m 2 2 1 Caution Execution of this command may affect service Click on Yes if you want to establish the cross connections individually Click on Yes to A
276. path only uses one rotation of the ring a single time slot may contain two video paths The following illustration shows two Video Service paths The first path denoted by the solid line shows the signal being added at Node A the source and put on Rotation 2 through circuit pack mbl It follows the ring dropping at Nodes G E C and B The second path denoted by the dashed line 15 put on Rotation 1 through circuit pack mb2 It follows the ring dropping at Nodes C E and F 222 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 DDM 2000 OC 12 Ring Enter an STS 3C Video Service End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 12 and OC 12 OC 3 mixed ring when OC 3 is equipped with 24G U OLIU NOTE For the STS 3C path type to be available the following restrictions must be followed A low speed slot in the Video Source and Video Sink nodes must contain a 21 type OLIU circuit pack The OC 3 Lines application parameter in the Provision menu must be set to Video for each Video Source and Video Sink node in the ring The STS3 C feature must be enabled for each DDM 2000 OC 12 node in the ring This feature 15 enabled in MML by entering the SET FEAT command in the AUI or from the Provision Menu In TL1 enter the ENT FEAT command in the AUI See the DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual for complete details The DDM 2000 OC 3 equipped with 24G OLIU s can only support an STS 3C pass through cross connect A video source
277. pically for an FT 2000 OC 48 NE the WAITFOR statement contains a semicolon and for a DDM 2000 the WAITFOR statement contains a greater than sign gt The semicolon and are the prompts used by an NE to indicate that 1t is ready for further user input The Pause Command The pause command used in the format PAUSE can be used to tell CPro 2000 not to send anything to an NE for a defined period of time The number that follows pause is a quantity of microseconds For example PAUSE 1000 means wait for one second and PAUSE 40000 means wait for 40 seconds The pause quantity should be modified to meet your specific needs The most common use of the PAUSE command 15 for a WAITFOR statement where XXX 1s an action that may not work correctly For example after logging into a DDM 2000 but before the user prompt appears the system requests the user to supply a carriage return Instead of using WAITFOR carriage return to continue the script can simply PAUSE 1000 Example Data Communications Script File The text shown below is a sample data communications script file settings com2 9600 n 8 1 none connect pause 500 transmit pause 500 if connect fail user msg The connection attempt to the comport failed exit j Ug pause 1000 transmit gp pause 1000 transmitt Vr pause 1000 340 Appendix D Script and Batch Files CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix E Ba
278. po 342 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table for FiberReach with TL1 continued Area t Alam 16 7 Port amp Line Restore Cmd Backup Cmd set attr alm RTRV ATTR ALM pmn Parameter Special Conditions almdel X X Alarm set attr env RTRV ATTR ENV ntfcnde RT only X almmsg X almtype X ent tl RTRV TI LINECDE X NTFCNCDE X BPV X AIS X SFTHR X PMMD X FMT X PST X BENE 9 1 ent oc3 ent ocl ent vtl ent sts1 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 RTRV OC3 RTRV OCI RTRV VTI RTRV STSI SFTHRSYNCMSG If equipped with 28 G U SFTHR only AISNC SFTHR SFAIL AISNCSA AISNC PST X Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters 343 Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table for FiberReach with TL1 continued B3CVP B3 ES P B3 ESA P B3 ESB P B3 SES P HIM NA aia B mE 344 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 gt lt X X X X X X B3 UAS P ENT FEAT enabled See SpecCond 630 V5 ESP V5 SES P V5 UAS P ENT FEAT DS1pm enabled See SpecCond 630 CVP modifier 2 SF CVP modifier ESF ESP SESP UASP CVPFE ESPFE SESPFE UASPFE PA pA
279. r boxes rather than the smaller STS slots contained within them 126 Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connection Properties From gt To mb 4 gt d NOTE The following restrictions must be followed to create a video sink cross connection One address in the cross connection must be a main and one address must be a low speed slot e The low speed slot must contain a 21 type OLIU circuit pack e The STS 3C feature must be enabled This feature is enabled in MML using the SET FEAT command and TL1 using the ENT FEAT command See your DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual for complete details e The OC 3 Lines application parameter in the Provision menu must be set to video 2 Click on Cancel if the addresses shown in the screen are incorrect Select the Video Sink cross connection icon right icon from the Cross Connections Properties toolbar 3 Click on OK and the following screen appears Contirm Cross Connection Enter Enter Video Sink From To Caution Execution of this command may affect service Cen am emm 4 Click on Yes if you want to establish the cross connection Click on No if you do not want to establish this cross connection Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 5 The cross connection appears on the Network Element View as shown in the following sample CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connections
280. r feature was disabled 3 Close this window from the File menu or by using the Close button Deleting a pager log file To delete a log file 1 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Click Delete in the Pager Log File If no Pager Log File exists the follow message appears Alarm ex If a Pager Log File exists the following confirmation message appears 294 e The Alarms Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 9 Cancel 3 Click OK to proceed or Cancel withdraw the command NOTE The system permits deletions of Pager Log Files only after the pager service is disabled li The Call List Tab From the Call List tabbed page you can e specify a pager number e type in a name to associate with that pager number e select the pager type and e specify alarm levels to be associated with that pager number In addition you can add edit or delete the names and phone numbers from the call list Alarm Preferences Defining the call list parameters 1 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Click the Call List tab The following page appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Alarms Menu e 295 Alarm Preferences 3 Click Add to activate the fields The new window should look like this 4 Inthe Name field type a name
281. r node interworking ring TIDs need to be identified for the following four functions primary node ring A primary node ring B secondary node ring A and secondary node ring B It is also critical that the direction in which the DRI cross connections are to be added is identified in advance for successful subnetwork functionality low speed connections use the following packs DDM 2000 3 or STS 1E e FT 2000 OC 3 OC 12 DDM 2000 Interoffice Rings When the interoffice ring is a DDM 2000 3 ring or DDM 2000 OC 12 ring two drop and continue nodes are used to connect to each of the two access rings or to a single access ring and then off the network for example connecting to a point of presence POP to a long distance carrier where traffic terminates FT 2000 Interoffice Rings See the following figure for an illustration of a common FT 2000 OC 48 four node arrangement 264 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 2000 RING A W Other Node s RING B FT 2000 Enter an STS 1 Four Node Interworking End to End Path DDM 2000 only Procedure 1 From the End to End Path menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click on the tabs for STS1 signal rate and 4 Node Intwk path type CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 265 Enter
282. r parent ring 13 Click on OK then click Cancel in the End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The following screen shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path 2000 2 GUI DC3 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 811 1 2 Access Edit View Report Provision Update Window X Donns Alarms Help D n af 0C3 3 DDM 2000 0 3 1112 PETI ES 1 003 2 2000 06 3 R11 1 2 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 277 Enter STS 3 Two way Four Node Interworking End to End Path FT 2000 OC 48 only Procedure 1 From the End to End Path menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click on the tabs for STS3 signal rate and 4 Node Intwk path type Enter End To End Path 3 Made Inbwk 2 Atthe bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose the secondary node for Ring A Double click on the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot 3 Select the low speed slot for the secondary node for Ring A Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time 278 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen is correct click OK The following screen appears Choose the Tributary
283. r the bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose add drop node Double click on the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot 3 Select the low speed slot to be used for this add drop node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 197 cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen 15 correct click on OK The following screen appears Choose the Timeslot 4 Select the time slot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid time slot numbers are displayed Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected Enter End To End Path Twoway Ring Transport Twoway Add Drop Node Selected Low Speed Tributary m 1 Note The 815 Path can contain 0 1 Twoways any number of Dual 0x13 and pairs of Single Ox1s A valid pair of Single Ox1s is one to the service slot and the other to the 0 protection slot 5 5 You prompted to select the next add drop node Double click on the desired node The following screen appears 198 End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Choose the Low Speed Slot 6 Select the low speed slot for this add drop node Click on OK The main end to end p
284. reported for this HE CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Report Menu 95 Paths Tributary 2000 48 Purpose The paths in tributary report 15 used to obtain a graphical display of all the paths in a specified tributary for the current partition Procedure 1 From the Report pull down menu select Paths in Tributary The following dialog box appears Paths in Tributary Report Specify Tributary Number from 1 to 16 2 Enter the tributary number between 1 and 16 for which you want a report Click on OK A report similar to the following appears 2 PathinTributaryReport Od 2000 Paths in Iribntary Raport 12 109764 15 11 For Partition 1 This partition contamz FT 2000 CIC 4 8 network elerentz Faths in Tributary 2 DSL 123456 DSL 123456 590125456 59012545 DSL 123456 DSL 123456 5 7590125451 EE EES 96 The Report Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Bandwidth Usage Purpose To display a report that details the bandwidth usage between two NEs As described in Report Screen Functions earlier in this chapter you can perform a variety of tasks on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report NOTE The Bandwidth Usage report is displayed by clicking the right mouse button on the optical link between NEs in the expanded partition of the Subnetwork View It
285. retrieve and display information about users who are logged into a network element Procedure 1 From the Update pull down menu select Active User The following form appears t Active User Information B x Active Users Tin e eed ro Access Link Active User SNC 0C12 GG cit 1 Time 2713798 10 26 31 Close 2 Click on Refresh to update active users information You can click on Close at any time to close the form 176 The Update Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Map Subnetwork View Purpose To update the Subnetwork View by retrieving the topology from all the nodes in the selected partition This menu item 1s only available from the Subnetwork View Procedure 1 From the Update pull down menu select Update Map The Subnetwork View is updated with the topology of the current partition Inventory Subnetwork View Purpose To retrieve the equipage cross connections and partition topology from all the nodes in the selected partition When the Update Inventory command 15 completed successfully the Subnetwork View 15 redisplayed This menu item is only available from the Subnetwork View Procedure 1 From the Update pull down menu select Update Inventory See Partitioning in the CPro 2000 Startup chapter for specific details on a Partition Inventory and its contents CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Update Menu 177 178 T
286. rieve Attribute Environment RTRV CRS STS1 Retrieve Cross Connection STS 1 Update Cross Connections RTRV EC1 Retrieve EC 1 Provision EC 1 RTRV EQPT Retrieve Equipment Update Network Element RTRV FEAT Retrieve Feature RTRV FECOM Retrieve Far EndCommunications RTRV HSTY Reports History RTRV LGN Retrieve Login 0 RTRV LINK Retrieve Link RTRV NE Retrieve Network Element Update Network Element Inventory RTRV NMAP Retrieve Network Map 1 RTRV OCI2 Retrieve OC 12 Provision OC 12 RTRV OC3 Retrieve OC 3 Provision OC 3 RTRV PM LINE Retrieve Performance Monitoring Line 77777 RTRV PM SECT Retrieve Performance Monitoring Section RTRV PM STS1 Retrieve Performance Monitoring STS 1 Reports PM Data STS1PM Data DS3PM RTRV PM TCA Retrieve Performance Monitoring TCA Threshold Line RENT aeneo Threshold Section _ Threshold STS 1 ESE CER Threshold T3 NENNEN ______ RTRV STATE STS1 Retrieve State STS 1 5 51 Retrieve STS 1 Reports STS 1 322 Appendix DDM 2000 OC 12 Commands CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 OC 12 CIT Command Description CPro 2000 Menu Item RTRV SYNC Retrieve Synchronization RTRV ULSDCC Retrieve Upper Layer Section SET ATTR ALM Set Attribute Alarm SET ATTR CONT Set Attribute Control SET ATTR ENV Set Attribute Environment SET DATE SetDate o o SET ECI SET FEAT Set Featur
287. ro 2000 called DEFAULT SCR For aExample Data Communications Script File see the sample at the end of this appendix CPro 2000 uses this script unless a different script file name is specified CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix D Script and Batch Files 337 DEFAULT SCR file contains the following lines settings 1 9600 7 1 connect if connect fail user msg Could not connect to COMI exit This simple script file allows the user to access the communications port on the PC and then stops Listed below is a detailed explanation of each line in the script file e settings com1 9600 e 7 1 none This line 18 usually the first line of any script file It indicates which line communicates with the subnetwork coml is the communications port on the PC that is used to connect the NE 9600 indicates that the communications are at 9 6 Kbps eindicates that the parity is even 7 indicates that there are 7 data bits 1 indicates that there is 1 stop bit none indicates that there is handshaking connect This line causes the AUI to access the communications port identified in the settings command using the speed parity data and stop bit information provided if connect fail This line allows the user to define what happens if the AUI 15 unable to connect to the communications port on the PC user msg Could not con
288. ro 2000 provides through the GUI is obtained directly from the NEs themselves The CPro 2000 GUI provides information to users based on data that it stores therefore it 1s possible for CPro 2000 to open a Network Element View or to provide reports without ever accessing the NE itself When CPro 2000 needs to retrieve information from or send information to the NE CPro 2000 logs into the NE that must be accessed CPro 2000 automatically accesses the appropriate NE because it keeps track of which NE it is currently logged into and compares that information to the NE that must be accessed When communication to a remote NE 15 lost or when the user accesses NEs via the AUI the GUI and AUI may indicate that they are logged into different NEs This may cause CPro 2000 to be unable to complete a specified task CPro 2000 1s designed to correct this situation automatically and access the appropriate NE However if a problem occurs and CPro 2000 cannot correct this situation the AUI should be used to access the local node CPro 2000 will then be able to complete the specified task If you are logged out of the local node or off the subnetwork entirely you should also use the AUI to log back into the local node prior to continuing with your current CPro 2000 session The Graphical User Interface GUI 34 The User Interfaces The GUI consists of a multiple document interface MDI which can accommodate a Subnetwork View and several Network Eleme
289. ro 2000 reports are displayed in a window similar to the following gt Path Report 2000 Path Report september 20 1999 16 23 For Partition P 1 Thus partition contams 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 neterork elementis There are no paths m this partition Dangling cross connections in this Partition Network Element OC3 6 DDM 2000 3 E11 1 2 There are cross connections at this network element Network Element OC3 7 DDMI 2000 3 11 1 2 STS1 CROSS CONNECTIONS There STS oss connections at this element VT1 5 CROSS CONNECTIONS Rm ____ m o 4 report windows contain the following useful functions e The View function allows you to make the size of the report larger or smaller by selecting a value from the View down arrow list The Page function can be accessed two ways By using the arrows lt lt lt gt gt gt you can go through the report page by page either backward or forward You can also click on the Page box and edit the current page number to the page number you want NOTE The Page Up and Page Down keys on your PC keyboard do not work in the Report Viewer Also the scroll bar appearing on the right side of the Report Viewer does not take you to the next page of the report the scroll bar only takes you from top to bottom of an individual page Use the arrows as described above to access the next or previous page of the report
290. roblems User tries to start new CPro 2000 session but is unable to because the port has continued to stay connected to the AUI Action Toggle COM port by choosing CONNECT DISCONNECT CONNECT from the AUI Communication pull down menu Restart CPro 2000 using your normal procedures NOTE If you were in the process of an end to end operation you may want to run a Path report to determine if there is any dangling cross connections Problem The labels such as m1 mb 1 e w in the Subnetwork View overwrite each other or display incorrectly Action Rearrange the node icons in the Subnetwork View window until the labels display correctly Problem Customized background colors derived from the Windows Control Panel Settings menu are obscuring CPro 2000 GUI elements such as cross connection lines NE icons or ports slots in a Network Element View Action It is recommended that the user does NOT customize the background color of the windows If the user must customize the window background color be sure to use colors that do not conflict with the colors CPro 2000 uses in its graphical displays See The User Interfaces chapter for a detailed listing of the color conventions used in CPro 2000 Problem The error message Invalid Port Response is displayed and 2000 15 directly connected to the DTE port using a null modem CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Troubleshooting 303 Action Verify whether the correct null
291. rpose Allows the user to close all the windows including any Network Element Views and the Subnetwork View that are currently displayed This command does not log you out of an NE disconnect you from the subnetwork or exit you from CPro 2000 Procedure 1 From the Access pull down menu select Close Windows 2 Allopen windows are closed Purpose The Login command is used to log into remote nodes in the local node s subnetwork and is only available from an open Network Element View CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Logout Procedure 1 Inthe Access pull down menu the Login command is enabled if the desired node has been inventoried at least once and you are not already logged into it Select Login CPro 2000 logs into the node using the user ID and password provided during initial login to the subnetwork NOTES Since the DDM 2000 MML systems require that any remote login session currently in progress must be terminated before another remote login session can be established CPro 2000 automatically logs out of one remote session and then performs the user requested remote login If you receive an error while logging in remember to check the information given in the AUI Sometimes this explains exactly why the login attempt or any other command has failed Purpose Use this command to log out of the current node For a DDM 2000 it may be either a remote node or a local node This command 15 only available from
292. rs prompting changes to LocA The down arrow list for Select New Destination is grayed out and not selectable e For an add cross connection meaning that the cross connection s source AID is in a slot and the destination AID is in a tributary the dialog box appears prompting changes to LocZ The down arrow list for Select New Source is grayed out and not selectable For a pass through or DRI cross connection meaning that both the source and destination AIDs are in tributaries the dialog box appears prompting changes to LocA and or LocZ Both Select New Source and Select New Destination are available to make changes 5 Enter the new LocA and or LocZ value and click on OK At any time during this operation you may click on Cancel and none of your changes are executed CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connections e 147 Roll an Existing STS 3 or STS 1 Cross Connection to a New Source FT 2000 OC 48 only Procedure 1 Click the left mouse button on the line representing the cross connection for which you want to roll the source The line becomes highlighted 2 Dragthe cross connection line to a new source and then release the mouse button NOTE This procedure can also be achieved by clicking on the right mouse button NOTE When overlapping multiple cross connections exist the following screen appears first Select the appropriate Cross Connection x Please select the appropriate Cross Connection
293. rst add drop node Double click on the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears 214 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 3 Choose the Low Speed Slot 1 5 2 Iz 1a 3 is 1b 1 Is 1h 2 Is 1h 3 5 2 1 1 2 2 Iz 2a 3 Is 2h 1 Is 2b 2 Is 2b 3 1 Er iz Select the low speed slot to be used for this add drop node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen 15 correct click on OK The following screen appears Choose the Tributary stz1 1e 1 1 sts1 1e 1 2 sts1 le 1 3 sts1 le 2 1 stz1 1e 2 3 stz1 1e 3 1 stz1 1e 3 2 sts1 le 3 3 sts1 1le 4 1 sts1 le 4 2 sts1 1e 4 3 sts1 1e 5 1 _ _2 4 Select the tributary that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid tributary numbers are displayed Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 End to End Path Menu 215 Enter End To End Path 4 SVC FTS Add Drop Mode 1 5 Selected Low Speed Iz Th 1 Tributary sts1 le 2 2 5 You are prompted to choose a second add drop node Double click on the desired node The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot
294. rt pull down menu select Provision Options and then select CMS A report similar to the following appears EE CMS Ports Provisioning Report 00 CMS Port Provisioning Report for JEFF July ta 2887 13 25 JEFF 97 07 16 13 26 50 ems la LEVEL OC3 NTFCHCDE MN SDTHE 5 008 MA AS cms Za LEVEL OC3 NTFCHCDE MN SDTHRER 5 0085 MA AS ecms ia LEVEL OC3 NTFCHCDE MN SDTHR 5 005 MA ASZ DIILEVEL OC3 NTFCHCDE MN SDTHR b O0O5 MA ASZ Section Trace OLS only Purpose To view a report that traces an OC 48 signal throughout all its sections As described in Report Screen Functions earlier in this chapter you can perform a variety of tasks on the Section Trace report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report Procedure 1 From the Report pull down menu select Section Trace The following screen appears 108 The Report Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Section Trace Report Target ID Channel ID NR Get Report Cancel 2 Use the down arrow list to select the desired Channel ID 3 You click on Cancel to close the screen To generate the Section Trace report click on Get Report and a report similar to the following appears Section Trace Report Iof CFro z000 Section Trace Report for MON BEACHI February 18 1998 8 12 23 MON BEACH1 88 02 18 12 23 22 ntu l 1 1 status NOT APPLICABLE NTFCNCDE NA I
295. rvice tributaries while the corresponding service tributaries become unprotected NPPA See Non Preemptible Protection Access Object Linking and Embedding OLE This Windows feature 15 used to transfer and share information between Windows based applications and accessories For 2000 the OLE Object Packager tool registers the application in a database and subsequently creates a CPro 2000 program group and associated icons OC 12 Optical Carrier 12 15 a SONET signal capable of carrying 12 STS 1 signals or the equivalent OC 3 Optical Carrier 3 1s a SONET signal capable of carrying three STS 1 signals or the equivalent OC 48 Optical Carrier 48 is a SONET signal capable of carrying 48 STS 1 signals or the equivalent OLE See Object Linking and Embedding OLS See Optical Line System Operations System An operations system OS is a system providing support for telephone company operations for example network surveillance and provisioning CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Optical Line System A flexible high capacity analog lightwave system that uses dense wave multiplexing DWDM technology to multiplex digitally encoded information contained in up to eight different wavelengths It transmits the resulting combined signal through optical fibers and then demultiplexes the information at the other end OS See Operations System Packet Assembler Disassembler An interface between a de
296. s NOTE Subsequent CPro 2000 sessions open with the last value selected Adjusting the alarm polling repeat interval 1 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Change Auto Poll Minutes to the desired repeat interval from 1 to 90 minutes using the up and down arrows The default repeat interval is 3 minutes 3 Click OK to save the current settings and dismiss the Alarm Preferences dialog box or Close dismiss the dialog box without saving any settings NOTE Subsequent CPro 2000 sessions open with the last value selected Selecting the modem communication port 1 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Click the down arrow next to the Modem Comm Port field to display a list of available comm ports 3 Select the comm port that corresponds to your modem 4 Click OK to save the current settings and dismiss the Alarm Preferences dialog box or Close dismiss the dialog box without saving any settings NOTE Subsequent CPro 2000 sessions open with the last selected port number Specifying a number prefix for an outside line In some settings a prefix might be required in order to access an outside phone line The To access an Outside Line first dial field is where you specify a prefix the system must dial to access an outside phone line To specify a number prefix 1 From the
297. s A Locked Arc path must be at the VT1 5 signal rate and is only applicable to DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach NEs A locked path contains locked cross connections which only transmit signal to and receive signal from one OLIU circuit pack in the mains The signal uses both rotations of the ring but only a portion of the ring is being used for the path The following illustration shows a Locked Arc path in a single DDM 2000 OC 3 ring The add drop cross connection at Node A is a locked cross connection and the signal is being passed through the circuit pack in slot m2 At Node B there is a two way pass through cross connection At Node C there is another add drop cross connection that is also locked This cross connection takes the signal through the circuit pack in m1 and drops it It also takes incoming signal CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 227 Locked cross connections use the Ring ID to designate which main slot is to be used to transmit and receive the signal For this path the Ring ID at Node 15 m2 and the Ring ID at Node C is ml Enter a VT1 5 Locked Arc End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 3 R9 X 11 and FiberReach only Procedure 1 From the End to End Path Menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click on the tabs for VT1 5 signal rate and Locked Arc path type 228 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6
298. s Depending on the NE type the following choices are displayed Select All displays all existing cross connections STS 1 displays all STS 1 cross connections DDM 2000 only VTI 5 displays all VT1 5 cross connections DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach only STS 3C displays all STS 3C cross connections DDM 2000 OC 12 STS 3 displays all STS 3 cross connections FT 2000 only The cross connections are then displayed in the current Network Element View Hide X Conn Purpose To hide all cross connections while in a Network Element View Procedure 1 Inthe View pull down menu click Hide X Conn On the current Network Element View all cross connections are hidden Subnetwork View Purpose To display the Subnetwork View 84 The View Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Procedure Inthe View pull down menu click Subnetwork View A window is opened the Subnetwork View 1s displayed Report Viewer Purpose To enable a user to perform functions such as viewing or printing a previously saved report or end to end path graphic See The Report Menu chapter for details on how to save a report to a file NOTE Do not use the Report Viewer to open files that are not report viewer files or end to end path graphics It is recommended that you use the rpt and suffixes when saving these types of files to avoid confusion with ordinary text files such as those with a t xt suffix If
299. s to different locations in the GUI The information window also displays messages about in progress tasks Trashcan Icon right section used to delete cross connections You can select and drag a cross connection line source or destination to the trashcan icon A cross connection deletion box appears confirming that you want to delete the cross connection See Cross Connection Deletion in the Cross Connections chapter for further details Audible Alarm Button right section displays a graphical representation of the audible alarm status in the Alarms menu Click this button to change audible alarm status Audible alarm is on when button is depressed and off when button 15 up e Pager Button right section displays a graphical representation of the pager status in the Alarms menu Click this button to change pager status The Pager feature is on when button is depressed and off when button is up The Cancel Dialog Box CPro 2000 provides the feature of being able to cancel an operation while in progress While each command is being sent from CPro 2000 to the NEs a dialog box appears containing a Cancel button The text in the dialog box changes dynamically as the command progresses For example a CPro 2000 operation can consist of several NE commands which are sent through the AUI to the NE such as creating an end to end path The CPro 2000 end to end path command consists of the ENT CRS commands for each cross c
300. s activated to notify the user of any signal problem See Audit On Option earlier in this chapter 2 Click on Cancel if the AIDs shown in the screen are incorrect Select the Multi drop cross connection icon right hand side of toolbar The following screen appears immediately Choose Low Speed 51015 3 While holding down the Shift key or Control key select the multiple low speed slots for the cross connection destination Click on OK NOTE Pressing the Shift key allows a contiguous range of slots to be selected with the mouse Pressing the Control key allows a non contiguous range to be selected 4 Cross Connection Properties box redisplays Select the Source TIDs from the down arrow lists Click on OK and the following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connections 145 Confirm Cross Connection Enter Enter Oneway From 1253 12 8 Iz 3a Source TID 1 Caution Execution of this command may affect service 5 Click on Yes if you want to establish the multiple cross connections individually Click on Yes to All if you want to establish all the cross connections in the multi drop Click on No if you do not want to establish this cross connection Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 6 The cross connection appears the Network Element View as shown in the following sample S751 FT 2000 OC 46 R7 0 Change LocA and LocZ Values
301. s are displayed Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 219 220 The End to End Path Menu 5 6 Enter End T o End Path Add Node 5VC FT3 Selected Low Speed Is 1b 1 Tributary sts1 1e 1 1 Iz 1a 1 Iz 1a 2 3 Is 1h 1 Is 1h 2 Is 1h 3 1 2 1 1 2 2 Iz 2a 3 1 2 1 1 2 2 Is 2h 3 Iz 3a 1 2 2 SVC FTS Choose the Low Speed Slot At the bottom of the form you are prompted to choose the drop node Double click on the desired node The following screen appears Select the low speed slot for this drop node Click on OK The main end to end path form displays CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Enter Path SVC FTS Add Node S C FT3 Selected Low Speed Is 1b 1 Tributary sts1 1le 1 1 Drop LSO1 FT3 7 You are prompted to choose another drop node for creating a multi drop path or to create the end to end path When ready to create the path click on OK The following screen appears Enter End To End Path Es Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want to continue 8 Click on No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click on Yes The following message box displays Enter End T o End Path
302. s connections are created separately 238 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Enter STS 1 Three Node Interworking End to End Path DDM 2000 only Procedure 1 From the End to End Path menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available to select Click on the STSI and 3 Node Intwk tabs Enter End To End Path ES 2 Atthe bottom of the form you are prompted to choose the Add Drop Node Double click on the node you have selected The following screen displays 3 Select the low speed slot for the Add Drop Node from the scroll list Only valid slot numbers are displayed Click on OK The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 239 Choose the Timeslot 4 Select the timeslot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid timeslot numbers are displayed Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the Add Drop Node information you have selected Enter End To End Path Add Drop Node 2 Selected Low Speed b 1 Tributary m 1 5 At the bottom of the form you are prompted to choose the Primary Node Double click on the node you have selected The following screen appears 240 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Choose the Low Speed Slot 6 Select the low speed slot for the Primary Node from the scroll list
303. sabled The default setting for this feature is disabled When the feature is enabled the polling interval defaults to the last saved setting The Auto Alarm Polling feature updates the alarm status for the node in view You must therefore ensure that the NE view is displayed on your monitor when this feature is enabled The default auto alarm polling interval is three minutes You can change this to a minimum of one minute and up to a maximum of 90 minutes using the Preferences option in the Alarm menu To change this interval follow instructions in the Preferences section of this chapter The interval in Auto Polling Minutes field overrides the corresponding values specified in the CPRO INI file The system writes and saves the values in the Auto Polling Minutes field into the CPRO INI file when you log out of CPro CPro 2000 uses these previously saved values when the system 15 started for a new session Alarm polling is temporarily disabled when any CPro 2000 function such as a backup or a restore is in progress NOTE CPro 2000 displays the highest alarm level reported back by the NE in the bottom left corner of the GUI window CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Procedure 1 From the GUI click Alarms 2 Select Auto Alarm Polling from the list of options Audible Alarms Purpose CPro 2000 R5 2 GUI Access View F zm rmm Palling Audible Alarm Pager Preferences To alert the user to the alarm sta
304. script file will overwrite the current communication settings To ensure that the settings chosen manually either through the AUI or GUI are not overwritten remove the file named DEFAULT SCR from the Script field of the Login dialog box 3 Click on Options The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 CPro 2000 Startup e 25 Communications Options Direct Connect Dial to Connect Timeout if not connected in Seconds 4 Direct Connect is the default setting Choose Dial to Connect if you are using a modem and click OK 5 Click on the Port Settings tab in the Communications Options window The following screen appears Communications Options Connect 242222222222 Preferences MAAE SLRS Communications Port Comi Baud Hate 9600 Flow Control None Panty n None Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 6 Verify that the settings are correct for your PC environment If not using the down arrow lists beside each option choose the correct settings such as Communications Port and Baud Rate Click on OK 7 If you are using a modem click on the Modem Commands tab in the Communications Options window The following screen appears 26 CPro 2000 Startup CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Communications Options X Modem Commands Connect Preferences Port Settings Cance 8 Enter the Phone Number to be dialed and select the appropr
305. select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click on the tabs for STS3C and Twoway path type Ciz me 1 yk OC 1z OC 12 3 me 1 gt mb rm 2 Atthe bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose the first add drop node Double click on the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 201 1 3 Select the low speed slot to be used for this add drop node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen 15 correct click on OK The following screen appears 4 Select the time slot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid time slot numbers are displayed Click on OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected 202 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Enter End To End Path Twoway Ciz mb l mbz me 14 OC 12 OC 12 3 me gt mb Add Drop Mode 1 OC1 1 Selected Low Speed c Tributary 5 You are prompted to select the next add drop node Double click on the desired node The following screen appears Choose the Lo
306. sentations section in The User Interfaces chapter ii Connecting to an NE Manually This procedure details how to access the subnetwork using the AUI without a data communications script Similar to accessing CPro 2000 via a data communications script this access method 15 also used when the PC running CPro 2000 15 directly connected to the CIT port of the NE or the X 25 port of a DDM 2000 or an FT 2000 48 if connected with a PAD Procedure 1 Make sure that all the communications settings are correct for the type of communications connection being made see the Selecting Communications Options section earlier in this chapter 2 From Communications pull down menu of the AUI select Connect If the menu choice says Disconnect you are already connected You may also connect by clicking on the Connect Disconnect button in the AUI 3 Change your cursor focus to the CPro 2000 GUI by clicking on it 4 From the Access menu choose either Open Subnetwork or New Subnetwork If you select New Subnetwork the Login dialog box immediately displays If you select Open Subnetwork choose the appropriate file from which the subnetwork is to be opened The Login dialog box displays Login Options Password Partition Partition Inventory Script Browse 5 In the Login dialog box enter the user ID password and if using TL1 the TID of the
307. set of line provisioning parameters 4 To update the values use down arrow list at each text box and select the appropriate values for each parameter 5 Click on Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click on Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Provision Menu e 155 Provisioning OC 1 Line Options DDM 2000 OC 3 9 11 X and FiberReach only Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select OC 1 Lines The following OC 1 Provisioning dialog box displays for DDM 2000 OC 1 Line Provisioning X Enter OC 1 Option Parameters Line Address Signal Degrade Threshold Current Value 5 Alarm Level Current V alue ILine State Current Value im Set Value Close The following OC 1 Line provisioning dialog box displays for FiberReach OC 1 Line Provisioning Enter 1 Option Parameters Line Address Signal Degrade Threshold Current Value AIS Alarm level NSA Current Value Set Value Close 2 Choose a line address by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the line address box A list of all OC 1 line addresses for the current node 1s displayed Choose one 3 Once a line address is chosen click on Get Value to see how the line is currently provisioned If a line address 15 chosen that contains the v
308. string Puts message box on screen containing the string where string is any string of text enclosed between double quotations Example USER MSG Command completed successfully ERROR MSG string Puts error message box on screen containing the string where string is any string of text enclosed between double quotations Example ERROR MSG Cannot log in to the system EXIT Terminates script execution with error END Terminates script execution normally TEMP_EXIT Provides a recallable exit point from the script file and stops the script execution temporarily CPro 2000 keeps a marker LAST_EXIT_POINT where the execution is halted When you execute the same script again it optionally allows you to run it from the point where it halted previously This statement should be used with STEP abel where label is any word NOTE The TEMP EXIT statement syntax is similar to the GOTO statement and can be used the same way Example 5 START If this step fails quit fix error and execute this Step again from its beginning IEMP EXIT NOTE The abel must be specified in the script file it should be preceded by a and appended by a colon for example advice GOTO label This 1s a C like GOTO statement that starts execution from the next line label where abel 1s any word Examples GOTO CONNECI EBRROR goto advice 332 Appendix D Script and Batch Files CPro 2000 User Manual Releas
309. sure that any new script files are thoroughly tested 7 8 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Login dialog box redisplays with the appropriate script file Click on OK If you selected Partition Map or Partition Inventory from the Login window CPro 2000 automatically logs into each of the NEs in the subnetwork using the user ID and password entered into the Login window NOTE If you deleted the contents of the Script field you must either select Connect from the Communications menu in the AUI or click on the Connect Disconnect button in the AUI to connect to an NE from this point NOTE The following window appears during login if one of the NEs in the subnetwork uses a different user ID or password other than the local node For example if you connect to a network that is made up of both FT 2000 and DDM 2000 NEs using the DDM password the system will display the Login dialog box when CPro 2000 reaches the FT 2000 while taking an inventory of the network If this window appears type in the correct user ID and password and then click on OK Login B x 0 LUCO3 E i Cancel Password EM After the login process the CPro 2000 GUI window appears displaying the appropriate Network Element View or Subnetwork View depending on the view you selected CPro 2000 Startup 29 NOTE To view examples of typical subnetwork and NE representations see the GUI Repre
310. t dest_aid SET TH OLINE RTRV TH OLINE montype modifier OLINE thlev locn dirn tmper tcarpt SET TH OCHAN RTRV TH montype modifier OCHAN SET TH SUPR RTRV TH SUPR montype modifier SUPR thlev locn dirn imper tcarpt SET TH OTPS RTRV TH OTPS montype thlev locn dirn imper tcarpt SET PM STIME RTRV PM STIME start hour X K gt 3b 3c 04 gt lt 378 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Special Conditions SpecCond 110 For DDM OC 3 NEs the backup procedure shall ignore the missing circuit pack 5 message under the following condition 1 Shelf 3 1s used AND 2 27 type OLIU is NOT installed Note Since BBF5 is detected through 27 type OLIU any installed BBF5 will not be detected without the 27 type OLIU even if it is installed Under this condition the error message should be suppressed to avoid confusion SpecCond 120 For DDM OC 3 that may be equipped for the MegaStar configuration MegaStar is denoted by the following conditions 1 RTRV SYS returns product MegaStar 2000 and 2 BBGS SYSCTL circut pack has 51 1 OFF 51 2 OFF 51 3 OFF 3 RTRV OC3 returns RADIO yes SpecCond 338 Restore commands ENT xxx shall not be issued to unequiped resources for DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 and FiberReach Restor
311. t lt gt lt gt lt g Perf set pmthres sect RTRV pmthres sect See SpecCond 630 Xmtr pwr 146 X X X X X X X X Xmtr pwr 2db X X X X X X x X Laser Bias X X X X X X X X X SEFS X X X X X X X X X Perf set pmthres line RTRV pmthres line See SpecCond 630 B2 X X X X X X X X X B2 X X X X B2 CV ECI X X X X X X X X X B2 ES X X X X X X X X X B2 ESA X X X X X X X X X B2 ESB X X X X X X X X X B2 SES X X X X X X X X X B2 UAS X X X X X X X X X PSC L X X X X X X X X X set pmthres sts 1 RTRV pmthres STS1 See SpecCond 630 358 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table for DDM OC 3 with MML continued Area Ord Restore Backup Parameter Special Conditions 62 74 72 80 81 90 191 110 111 RTRV pmthres T3 set pmthres vt NN RTRV pmthres VT1 RTRV pmthres T1 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 See SpecCond 630 CV L ES L SES L SEFS Pbit CV P CV P Fmbit CV P Cbit CV P ES P SES P UAS P SESFE Cbit CV P FE ES P FE SES P FE UAS P FE See SpecCond 630 See SpecCond 630 day ES L day CVPSF day CVPESF day ESP day SESP day UASP day CVPFE day ESPFE day SESPFE day UASPFE Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters 359 gt gt gt gt lt gt lt 04
312. t next to the final prompt Then press Ctrl V or select Paste from the Edit menu to paste the command e Follow the prompts in the AUI to execute the command then press Enter e Repeat the above procedure for other commands in the Notepad window copying the commands into the AUI one at a time When you have entered all the commands into the AUI close out of CPro 2000 then restart after the last command 15 executed NOTE If the command to change the TID Tid is listed in the Notepad window place it last in the AUI Restart CPro 2000 for the process to take effect CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Edit Menu 77 The following Restore Summary report displayed the status of other commands 55 Restore Report CPro 2000 Restore summary Report for 3 7 DDIVI 2000 OC 3 R11 1 september 20 1999 14 20 Equipage Differences equipment differences were found between the backup file and the network element Hardware Switch Setting Differences hardware switch setting differences were found between the backup file and the network element Login Mames from the backup file 4 9 Click on the Close button to close the report The following screen appears Change TID Purpose To change the current network element s TID Procedure 1 From the Edit pull down menu select Change TID The following Change TID dialog box appears 78 The Edit Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Old TID 0 37
313. t ring 11 Click OK then click Cancel in End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The screen below shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path 2000 2 GUI 0 3 1 DDM 2000 DC 3 R11 1 2 Acces a ee Cons up e 2 DDH 2008 OC 3 1112 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu 243 Enter a VT1 5 Three Node Interworking End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach only Procedure 1 From End to End Path menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available to select Click on the VT1 5 and 3 Node Intwk tabs Enter End To End Path Es Locked Arc Twaoway Hing Transport 2 Atthe bottom of the form you are prompted to choose the Add Drop Node Double click on the node you have selected The following screen displays 3 Select the low speed slot for the Add Drop Node from the scroll list Only valid slot numbers are displayed Click on OK The following screen appears 244 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Choose the Timeslot 4 Select the timeslot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid timeslot numbers are displayed Click on OK 5 The main end to end path form displays updated with the Add Drop Node information you have selected Enter End To End Path gt
314. tains termination points for individual STS 1 DS3 or STS 3C signals e The NE view for FiberReach contains termination points for up to 28 1051 signals for 7 protection e The Network Element View for an FT 2000 OC 48 R6 0 contains termination points for individual STS 3 signals For FT 2000 OC 48 R7 there are up to three STS 1 signals per STS 3 signal The arrangement of objects the Network Element View follows these general guidelines e For DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 and FiberReach The left side corresponds to the transmit fiber from and receive fiber to Main 1 m1 for DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach mb 1 for DDM 2000 OC 12 The right side corresponds to the transmit fiber from and receive fiber to Main 2 m2 for DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach mb 2 for DDM 2000 OC 12 in ring configurations The bottom side corresponds to the function units used for add drop cross connections NOTE If DDM 2000 3 or SLC 2000 contains 27 type OLIU circuit packs in main slots CPro 2000 only displays two available STS 1s in the mains instead of the usual three These are labeled m1 and m2 If a DDM 2000 OC 3 contains a 21 type OLIU circuit pack in either the mains or the function units there is no access to the VT1 5s For DDM 2000 OC 3 NEs equipped with 24G U OLIU circuit pack in the mains top box on each side represents the STS 1 STS 3 interface Each of these boxes has four rows and four col
315. the Network Element View Procedure 1 From the Access pull down menu select Logout 2 Ifthe NE that you want to log out of is TL1 connected or not a local node it is not the node to which you logged into when you connected to the subnetwork you are logged out of the node and the Network Element View is closed if it is the local node 3 Ifthe NE is MML connected and 15 the local node the node to which you logged into when connecting to the subnetwork the following dialog box appears CPro 2000 RB5 2 GUI Are you sure that you want to logout of Local Node OL3 This will also logout of nodes 4 Click on Yes to log out of the local node and any other open Network Element Views including the Subnetwork View Click on No if you do not want to log out of the local node and close any open windows Node Manager Purpose To provide easy access to the subnetwork you are logged into and its components such as partitions and individual NEs The Node Manager allows you to open and close the Subnetwork View and Network Elements Views You can expand a partition to show all its CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Access Menu e 65 individual NEs perform a partition map or inventory rename a partition open close a partition You can also log in or log out of NEs Procedure 1 From the Access pull down menu or by clicking the toolbar icon ES select Node Manager The following screen 15 displayed
316. the Subnetwork View The path provisioning errors report contains the complete TL1 response for each alarm that is associated with provisioning errors at an NE as determined by the NE Audit function If the NE Audit has been suspended due to another error condition the report contains the condition circuitaudit suspended for that NE NOTE To correct a path provisioning error condition see Modify LocA and or LocZ in the chapter titled The End to End Path Menu for further details As described in Report Screen Functions earlier in this chapter you can perform a variety of tasks on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report Procedure 1 From the Report pull down menu select Path Provisioning Errors A report similar to the following appears Path Provisioning Error 2000 Path Provisioning Error Report February 12 1997 14 46 For Partition P 1 Thus partition contams 4 FT 2000 OC 48 network elementis Network Element DSL 123456789012345 B Ho path provisioning error conditions were reported for thus HE Network Elementi DSL 1234567990 12345 1 45 STS3 MIPAINTGET NS4 02 10 14 20 21 V path integrity failure 15 43 STS3 MIPAINTGET NSA 02 10 14 18 51 V path integrity failure 15 34 STS3 MIPAINTGET NS4 02 10 14 17 41 V path integrity failure Network Element D5L 123450785012345D path provisioning error conditions were
317. ting reports and windows 46 Protection State report 102 Provision Menu 22 42 125 27 153 196 200 223 249 313 Provisioning 5 303 311 313 339 R Range of VT1 5 cross connections 112 123 150 Range of VT1 5 Drop and Continue cross connections 138 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Rename Partition 24 51 71 80 Report Menu 40 41 83 85 89 313 Report viewer 41 46 51 52 64 83 85 87 89 91 Restore 7 35 50 71 72 74 78 153 288 305 341 79 381 Ring transport service 185 188 89 196 Roll an existing STS 3 or STS 1 cross connection 112 148 Run Batch Commands 50 57 68 329 Run Menu 45 S Save Subnetwork 35 50 57 62 Save Subnetwork As 50 57 62 Script file 16 18 25 28 30 31 45 59 68 329 332 33 335 40 Section Trace report 108 9 Selecting communications options 25 27 30 31 Set CID Secu 22 52 153 54 170 Set Date 52 153 54 166 317 323 Set Feat 52 153 54 170 Set NE 52 153 54 167 169 317 323 326 Set NPPA 52 153 166 Show X Conn 51 83 84 Single STS 1 cross connections 114 Single 0X1 VT1 5 cross connections 119 SLC 2000 5 6 40 44 304 309 311 389 Status Bar 33 35 41 45 51 53 83 99 111 307 STS 1 1 1 Protected OC 3 cross connections 133 STS 1 cross connections 84 112 14 116 129 STS 1 DRI cross connections 141 5 5 1 Drop and Continue cross connections 135 STS 1 Multi Drop cross connections 144 STS 1 One way end to
318. ting this cross connection CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connections e 133 Cross Connection Properties Src AID gt Dest AID Iz Za 1 gt siz1 1e 1 3 NOTE When Audit On is chosen an alarm is activated to notify the user of any signal problem See Audit On Option earlier in this chapter 2 134 Cross Connections Click on Cancel if the AIDs shown in the screen are incorrect Select the cross connection type two way at far left hand side of toolbar one way second from left on toolbar or DRI third from left on toolbar Select a Source or Destination TID if available for selection from the down arrow list Click on OK and the following screen appears Contirm Cross Connection Enter Enter Oneway From Iz Za 1 sts1 le 1 3 Destination TID Fi 1 Caution Execution of this command may affect service Ce emen Click on Yes if you want to establish the cross connection Click on No if you do not want to establish this cross connection Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation The cross connection appears on the Network Element View as shown in the following screen for an OC 3 slot pair 2a and 2b for 1 1 protection CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 STS1 FT ZUUU 4 R7 U NOTE The protection paths are entered automatically by the NE if the 1 1 provisioning already exists If the 1 1 provisioning is entered after the cross connection is create
319. tion Map or Partition Inventory see the Partitioning section earlier in this chapter These options tell CPro 2000 to depict the topology of the subnetwork to which you are logged in NOTE If the NE interface is TL1 you must either input a TID or select the TID of the initial login node from the down arrow list 3 For all NE types enter your user ID and press the Tab key Enter your password 4 fyou want to use a script other than the default click the Browse button to display the Select a Script File dialog box The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Select Script File Ed File Folders cApragra Tvcprar 2 Cancel EX default scr Z3 1 E 2 ft scr modem scr Help diii Network List files of type Drives Script Files scr Navigate to the CPro 2000 installation directory to access the Script Files If you accepted the default during installation CPro 2000 will be in C progra 2 Select one of the existing data communications scripts depending on your application Click on OK to select this script NOTE Although certain default script files are provided with the CPro 2000 software you can also create scripts see Appendix D Script and Batch Files for information on writing script files The script file supersedes entries in the CPRO INI file Therefore you must en
320. tion of this command may affect service Do you want to continue 4 Click on No if you do not want to delete the selected end to end path and you want to end this operation Click on Yes if you want to delete the selected end to end path The following screen appears 284 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Warming Please Confirm Your Action e Are you sure that you want to delete the selected path 5 Click on No if you want to abort the command and end this operation Click on Yes if you want to delete the selected end to end path 6 When your path has been successfully completed the following screen appears Delete End to End Path ah 59 Delete End To End Path Operation successfully completed 7 Click on OK Modify LocA LocZ Purpose The End to End Path menu also enables you to correct the LocA and or LocZ values of an FT 2000 OC 48 STS 3 or STS 1 path Use this command if you find LocA and or LocZ errors in your Path Provisioning Error report When you use the Modify LocA LocZ command CPro 2000 determines what the correct LocA and LocZ values should be and adjusts the values accordingly See the Lucent Technologies FT 2000 OC 48 User Service Manual for further details on path provisioning errors Procedure 1 From the End to End Path menu choose Modify LocA LocZ 2 Thefollowing path listing displays Loca Locz x Modify Path 4 1 3 1 e 13 C
321. to directly connect to the PC COM port See the CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 CPro 2000 Startup 27 28 CPro 2000 Startup appropriate NE User Service Manual for selecting the modem and settings for your COM port Procedure The following procedure explains how to access the subnetwork using the CPro 2000 GUI and a data communications script file 1 From the Access menu choose either New Subnetwork or Open Subnetwork NOTE If you select New Subnetwork the Login dialog box is immediately displayed If you select Open Subnetwork a list of previously saved files is displayed Note however that only files saved to the CPro 2000 R6 2 folder are displayed Choose the appropriate file for opening the subnetwork 2 The Login dialog box is displayed and automatically populated with the following defaults e The tabs at the top of the screen indicate the MML interface 15 the default e The script being used for communication The Script field may display the DEFAULT SCR The DEFAULT SCR contains default communication settings You can select another script file using the Browse button or change the communication settings using the AUI However you must delete the default script file to ensure that CPro 2000 uses the new settings file at login OF Cancel UserlD Options Password i Partition Map Partition Inventory Script Browse If you have chosen New Subnetwork you can either select Parti
322. tus of the network by sounding the appropriate audible alarm when an alarm is detected in the network The default repeat interval the number of seconds that pass from the start of one alarm sound to the start of the next alarm sound is three seconds To change this repeat interval to a maximum of 30 seconds use the Preferences option in the Alarms menu Refer to the Preferences section of this chapter for instructions on how to change this repeat interval NOTES CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Audible Alarms feature is only available when Auto Alarm Polling is enabled turned on A sound card must be installed in your PC for this feature to be available If you attempt to access this feature when a sound card is not installed the following message box displays Alarm x N The default setting for this feature is off or disabled CPro 2000 does not support alarm polling with the audible alarm or the alarm pager when the local node is a DDM 2000 shelf using TL1 connections In this case the audible alarms and alarm pager features are unavailable for selection For FT 2000s Remote Activity Reporting CPro 2000 automatically enables the FT 2000 from which the alarm status 15 retrieved the first node logged into for the network element alarm status to be reported when logged in via Alarms Menu 289 2000 R6 2 provides specific default sounds WAV files for each alarm severity lev
323. twork Configuration in DDM 2000 Causes Denials from Dini T SEL Window Menu Inconsistencies uos quvenebex even gt 311 Immovable Window after Maximize esses enne 311 SEC NE s Identified as OC 5s in 311 2000 sed aren NNNM 311 313 lg m 77772222 313 CP 314 314 Appendix DDM 2000 OC 3 Commands 315 DDM 2000 OC 3 User Service Manual Command 315 M UM MU M DM asses The Comtiands Cross Reference Table 315 DDM 2000 OC 3 User Service Manual Task Oriented 318 318 Cross Reference Table for Tasks Supported 2000 319 Appendix B DDM 2000 OC 12 Commands 321 DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual Command 5 321 PODOS ET 321 The Cross 321 DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual Task Oriented Procedures 324 Df DOSE E E ___ __ __ 324 The Cross Reference Table for Tasks Supported 2000
324. u are connecting via TL1 you cannot type a new TID into the dialog box You must choose from the known TIDs from the saved subnetwork information 4 Continue with Step 2 in the New Subnetwork section earlier in this chapter to complete the login process Close Subnetwork Purpose To disconnect from a subnetwork that 15 currently being accessed Procedure 1 From the Access pull down menu select Close Subnetwork The following screen appears 2000 R6 2 GUI p un 22 Are you sure you want to clase the currently active session This will clase the subnetwork and logout af all the nodes 2 Click on No if you do not want to close the subnetwork Click on Yes if you want to close the current subnetwork Note that this command does not completely exit you out of CPro 2000 see Exit later in this chapter The following screen displays 2000 66 2 GUI 3 Do you wish to save the information for this subnetwork CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Access Menu e 61 3 Click on if you do not want to save information about this subnetwork to a file Click on Yes if you want to save this subnetwork s information to a file The following screen displays 2000 66 2 GUI 22 Do want to disconnect Com Part 4 Click on NO if you want to keep Com Port open to facilitate further connections Click on Yes if you want to disconnect the Com Port Save Subn
325. ual Command Set Purpose The purpose of this section is to provide a cross reference between the Commands and Reports section of the Issue 5 of the Lucent Technologies DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual and the menu items of CPro 2000 The Cross Reference Table DDM 2000 OC 12 commands reports that do not have an entry in the CPro 2000 Menu column are not supported in CPro 2000 However since CPro 2000 allows concurrent access to both the GUI and AUI you can always enter the commands that are not supported on the CPro 2000 menus from the AUI window OC 12 CIT Command Description CPro 2000 Menu Item CPY PROG Copy Program DLT CRS STS1 Delete Cross Connection STS 1 X Conn Network ERES DLT TADRMAP Delete TID Address MAP ENT CRS STS1 Enter Cross Connection STS 1 X Network ENT ULSDCC Enter Upper Layer Section DCC NTPM_ Initialize Performance Monitoring INIT SYS Initialize System 00 INS PROG Install Program 002 _ Operate Alarm Cutoff CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix DDM 2000 OC 12 Commands 321 OC 12 CIT Command Description CPro 2000 Menu Item OPR LPBK EC Operate Loopback ECI OPR LPBK T3 1 7 RESET Reset RLS LPBK ECI Release Loopback ECI RLS LPBK T3 Release Loopback T3 Retrieve Attribute Alam J 00 5 RTRV ATTR CONT_ ______ Retrieve Attribute Control J RTRV ATTR ENV_ Ret
326. ugh the Settings command in the Communications pull down menu Save As allows you to save your settings file to another file name Make Default Settings allows the user to choose a settings file to use as the default for AUI sessions Exit terminates the AUI and all other sessions currently connected including the GUI When MML connected the Edit Menu provides the Send Break and Del Char commands that can be used to abort a command This menu also contains the Modify Script File command which allows the user to open the Notepad editor and make changes to a user specified script file This menu also allows the user to copy and paste text that 1s displayed in the AUI e The View Menu allows the user to change the AUI window according to his or her viewing needs The options that can be changed include hiding or displaying the status bar the font size and type and whether the window 15 displayed in color black and white or gray tones The Capture Menu gives the user the ability to capture screens containing commands that are sent to and received from the NEs and to save it to a file The Communications Menu contains commands for choosing connection preferences terminal emulation type port settings from an already created file or modifying the default values such as stop and data bits modem settings and connect disconnect See Accessing the Subnetwork in the CPro 2000 Startup chapter for further
327. umns The four entries in each row represent the STS 3 termination points and the three associated STS 1 termination points The bottom three boxes on each side represent the STS 1s that have been selected for either VT 1 5 cross connections or STS 1 add drop cross connections The bottom side corresponds to the function units used for add drop cross connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 For OLS NEs The rectangular boxes represent the Optical Amplifier packs OAs in the NE The black arrows show the optical fibers and their signal carrying direction These also depict the number of external frequencies multiplexed into one line of OLS the top corners the window shows what kind of nodes are connected on either side of this node OLS Non OLS NOTE The OLS network element is fundamentally different from any other NE as it does not handle any cross connections Therefore the primary purpose of the Network Element View for OLS is to provide an access to all menu items which perform NE level operations such as port provisioning and NE reports For FT 2000 OC 48 R6 0 NEs The West side displayed on the left side represents interfaces to the west STS 3 high speed tributaries The East side displayed on the right side represents interfaces to the east STS 3 high speed tributaries The bottom side represents the low speed slots DS3 EC1 OC3 used for add drop cross conne
328. up Cmd Special Conditions Perf 12 set th ecl RTRV TH ECI See SpecCond 630 CVL NEND all can be used to ESL NEND retrieve all these SESL NEND parameters s OOF NEND CVP NEND ESP NEND SESP NEND UASP NEND OOF FEND CVP FEND ESP FEND SESP FEND UASP FEND _ d l1 364 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM 12 with MML 5 0 5 1 X 5 2 Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Special Conditions Product ID po crt selector por s DN 1 set ne rtrv ne TID DSNE Site NE CO RT TBOS Addr TBOS Link TBOS Remote Idle Channel Sig agne Alarm Group X connect mode Shelf GNE gt lt gt lt Timeout DCC NS US Comm ent tlImsgmap rtrv tllImsgmap ACID 01 Maintenance tlIMemoryAdministr tl I Test 01 PeerComm tl1 2 Comm 5 ent osacmap rtrv osacmap VC Type SNPA Address ACID CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 365 Backup Restore Commands Parameters Release Relation Table for DDM OC 12 with MML continued Restore Backup Cmd Condition mop X X X System 7 5 5 x X x x Sync set sync rtrv sync Mode Switch x x x Syn Source x x x Syn Auto
329. ust be low speed slot For DDM 2000 OC 3 The low speed slot must contain two 27 type OLIU or two BBG19 circuit packs in both service and protection slots The service and protection lines must be set to in service 15 For DDM 2000 OC 12 The low speed slot must contain two 21 type OLIU circuit packs The OC 3 line application parameter for the function unit used in the cross connection must be set to 0 1 for TL1 and MML 2 following screen appears when you release the mouse button Cross Connection Properties From gt 3 Click on Cancel if the addresses shown in the screen are incorrect Click on and the following screen appears Confirm Cross Connection Enter Enter Dual 01 From 9 1 Caution Execution of this command may affect service Ces am 4 Click on Yes if you want to establish the cross connection Click on No if you do not want to establish this cross connection Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 5 cross connection appears on Network Element View as shown in the following sample NOTE dual 1 cross connection is shown with a dashed line to differentiate it from the solid line of a 1 1 two way cross connection 7 SNCOCIZEE DDM2 0000C12RS5 0 rael 10 maz rer Fig river rier Enter VT1 5 Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC
330. ution Execution of this command may affect service emen 3 Click on Yes if you want to establish the cross connection Click No if you do not want to establish this cross connection Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 4 cross connection appears the Network Element View as shown in the following sample CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Cross Connections 137 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 R3 1 Enter a Range of VT1 5 Drop and Continue Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 only Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click on the source slot of the cross connection To create a contiguous range such as m 1 1 1 m 1 1 2 m 1 1 3 and so of cross connections hold the Shift key on your keyboard and click on each of the additional slots or click on the last slot the slots in between are automatically chosen in your range To create a noncontiguous range such as 1 1 1 m 1 1 3 m 1 2 1 and so on of cross connections hold down the Control key and click on each of the additional slots in the range 2 Release the Shift or Control key and while holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the first destination slot of the range of cross connections The following screen appears when you release the mouse button Cross Connection Properties From gt To a Z gt m 2 7 1 2 gt 2 7 2 7 3 gt m2 73 a 7
331. vice and an X 25 packet switched network The packet assembler disassembler PAD converts the protocol used by the device and the X 25 protocol used by the network allowing terminals to exchange data with other packet mode terminals and hosts PAD See Packet Assembler Disassembler Partition A partition is a logical grouping of network elements of similar types all running compatible releases of software A ring hub and chain are considered to be partitions Performance Monitoring PM Data Data that measures the quality of service and identifies degrading or marginally operating systems before an alarm 15 generated SLC 2000 The Lucent Technologies digital loop carrier system with a built in OC 3 SONET multiplexer SONET See Synchronous Optical Network STS 1 The basic building block logical signal in the SONET standard with a rate of 51 840 Mbps STS 3 The basic building block logical signal with a rate of 155 52 Mbps CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Glossary of Terms 389 Subnetwork A group of interconnecting and inter related NEs The most common connotation 15 a SONET subnetwork in which the NEs have DCC connectivity Synchronous Optical Network The North American standard for the rates and formats defining optical signals and their constituents Target Identifier A target identifier TID allows an NE to be addressed TID See Target Identifier TL1 See Transaction Languag
332. vision pull down menu select Set CID Secu and then select DCE or DTE 170 The Provision Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The following dialog box displays for DCE SET CID FOR 0 48 Port Provisioning Port Type Time out Current Value Baud Rate ies Current V alue Port State Current Value Set Value Close The following dialog box displays for DTE SET CID DTE FOR ca48 Port Provisioning Enter SET DTE FOR OC48 Option Parameters Port Tunt Curent Value B Time out min Current Value Baud Hate Current V alue Port State Current Value Set Value Close 2 Click on Get Value to see the current settings 3 To update the value use the down arrow list and select the appropriate value 4 Click on Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click on Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made Update NE Purpose Updates the system database on the NE to reflect the existing hardware configuration and incoming signals This menu item is not available for all NEs Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select Update NE and the system database 15 updated CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The Provision Menu e 171 Provisioning OSI Parameters OLS only Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select OSI Stack and then sele
333. w Speed Slot 6 Select the low speed slot for this add drop node Click on OK The main end to end path form appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The End to End Path Menu e 203 204 The End to End Path Menu Enter End T o End Path Twoway Ciz mb l mbz mb 1 1 mL OC 1z OC 12 3 me 1 mb Add Drop Mode 1 OC1 1 Selected Low Speed Tributary Add Drop Node 2 OC1 2 3 Selected Low Speed If the information you have selected is correct click on OK to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Enter End To End Path 4 C Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want continue Click on No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click on Yes The following message box displays Enter End To End Path G End to End Path may be incomplete if the ring open Open rings will have no cross connects on the high speed parent ring Click on OK then click Cancel in the End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The screen below shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 2000 HB 2 GUI DC12 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 85 1 2 RET ie E ars ee EL JUMP DDM 2000 12 o Enter an STS 3 Two way End
334. window has the focus The icons from left to right represent the following commands New Subnetwork Open Subnetwork Save Subnetwork Print Backup Network Element Restore Network Element Node Manager Open Subnetwork View and Help 2 e 25 9 The Status Bar CPro 2000 displays a status bar at the bottom of the GUI screen as shown in the following illustration 0 236 0 OLIU The status bar is made up of three areas Alarm Status left section Indicates the most severe alarm present in the current node using the color conventions listed in the following table FT 2000 Representation DDM 2000 Representation CR critical and MJ major CR critical and MJ major alarms alarms MN minor alarms MN minor alarms NEA near end activity and ABN abnormal conditions CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The User Interfaces e 35 36 User Interfaces No alarms no alarm far end Or activity condition NA conditions not reported via CR MJ and MN LEDs office alarms or parallel telemetry Or NR conditions not reported via CR MJ and MN alarms office alarms parallel telemetry TL1 e Information Status center section contains various information depending on what task you are performing in the GUI Information on cross connections type address and signal rate and slot addresses change dynamically as your cursor move
335. wing restrictions must be followed A low speed slot in the add drop nodes must contain a 21 type OLIU circuit pack The OC 3 line application parameter must be set to 1 1 for each add drop node in the ring This is set in the Provision Menu The STS3 C feature must be enabled for each node in the ring This feature is enabled in MML using the SET FEAT command also available in the Provision Menu and in TL1 using the ENT FEAT command See your DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual for complete details The following screen is an example of how to enable the STS 3C feature in the AUI 200 The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 acolo PRATER GHIA ATS FEO THE Re Lei IL mI I Bid URFA TAHALLI 3 Poa weleched the pri fep compan ujth 428 Pastur Los IPEA II TEE oF to gi m Hir ud TE non NM mm ere eair QOHPFLD Foetus lone Espiri LIT RI LII LEEEEAGIEGOE BIS gx 1 From the End to End Path Menu
336. xample the Shift key or the Escape key e Press the Enter key means that you can press either Enter or Return This initiates an action in CPro 2000 On most PC keyboards these two keys perform the same operations In CPro 2000 they can be used interchangeably unless specifically stated otherwise All the keyboard shortcuts that are valid in any other Windows application are also valid in CPro 2000 such as pressing the Tab key to move the cursor from field to field in a window CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 About This Manual 3 4 About This Manul 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Introduction The Concept of CPro 2000 CPro 2000 is a Windows application that provides access to Lucent Technologies SONET NEs from a PC or laptop via a command based ASCII User Interface AUI and Graphical User Interface GUI For DDM 2000 SLC 2000 FiberReach and Optical Line System OLS NEs the native AUI available within the CPro 2000 environment is the same ASCII text based user interface that these NEs provide as an integral part of their generic software Users have access via an industry standard VT 100 terminal also known as an ASCII terminal However within the CPro 2000 environment the ASCII interface provides a number of useful features that may not be available on an ASCII terminal such as user developed scripts cut and paste capability and session capture to a file The CPro 2000 GUI allows users to execute t
337. xample the function 1s handling the time spent waiting for a response from an NE 334 e Appendix D Script and Batch Files CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 FUNCTION WAITING 2 waitfor 1 lfwalttor trtail user msq 2 exit The call to this sample function might look something like the following CALL WAITING lt DESTINATION gt lt Destination prompt not found gt Macros Macros provide the ability to put a variable into the body of a script file supply a prompt string for the variable and supply a default value for the variable When the script 15 run the user is prompted using the prompt string provided for a value of the variable or the default value 15 entered by CPro 2000 So whenever user input 15 desired you can use a macro Macros should be used like mini functions For example macros can be used if the user needs to enter a login ID and password The macro definitions would look like the following LOGIN ID Enter your login ID here PASSWORD Enter your password here Since these macro definitions have no default value and no range of valid values they contain a colon at the end of them The following is an example of how to use the sample macro definitions listed above transmite T S4ChOGLN ID NE transmitt 5 PASSWORD r These commands cause the login ID and a carriage return to be sent to the NE Then the password and another carriage return are sent to the NE Macros may also b
338. you wish to act ir from Is 3b 3 to sts1 1e 6 1 C from sts1 1e 6 1 to Iz 3b 3 3 Select the desired cross connection by clicking on the appropriate box Click on OK and the following screen appears Holl 515 1 SNC FT D2 cakes Cross Connection Type src aid Is 3b 3 dest aid sts1 1e 6 1 TwATDHI loca TID UNKNOWN locz SNC FT D1 type TwATDHI New Cross Connect src aid Iz 3b 1 dest aid sts1 1e 6 1 SHE FT D 2 laca locz SNC FT D2 type Tw AYDRI WARNING This action may be service affecting 4 You can change either the cross connection type or the LocA LocZ NOTE If the cross connection is a drop the user can change LocA If the cross connection is an add then the user can change LocZ Both can be changed for a through connection Select the cross connection type from the down arrow list The current cross connection type is shown as the default Or 148 CrossConnections 1 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Select the LocA LocZ from the down arrow list The current A LocZ is shown as the default 5 Ifthe information displayed in the dialog box is correct click on Roll and the new cross connection is created You may click on Cancel at any time and no changes are made to the cross connection Delete a Cross Connection Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click on the cross connection line you wish to de
339. you do try to open a non report file with the Report Viewer an error message displays and you are prompted to select another file name Procedure 1 In View pull down menu click on Report Viewer The following screen appears Enter Filename for Saving Report El gt File name Folders Cancel ay c progra 1 24 2 __ Hetwork Save file as type Drives Report Files E 2 Inthe File Name field type in the of the report you wish to view and click on OK You can click on Cancel at any time to dismiss this screen and return to the CPro 2000 GUI 3 The report is displayed in a window similar to the following CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 The View Menu 85 amp Network Element History Report x 200 History Report for OC3 7 DDM 2000 oc September 20 1999 15 12 Maintenance History Report Date Time DOUCE Ewent Level Description 01 05 21 06 06 CRITICAL cit z remote session terminated 01 05 20 24 14 CRITICAL cit z rlaqn nucii 01 05 20 14 59 CRITICAL cit z set state stsl m 1 01 05 20 14 55 CRITICAL cit z set stsl m 1 ent crs vtl m 1 7 1 CRITICAL You can perform the following functions on the report e The View function allows you to make the size of the report larger or smaller by selecting a value from the View down arrow list e The Page function be a
340. you prefer then click Next will be installed with the mast common options Recommended for most users C Compact Program will be installed with minimum required options Custom Tou may choose the options you want to install Recommended for advanced users lt Back Cancel NOTE If the CPRO INI file or the DEFAULT SCR file already exists from a previous installation in the directory where CPro 2000 is being installed a warning message appears informing you that your existing versions of the files have been saved in different files The earlier CPRO INI file is saved as cpro2 ini while the earlier DEFAULT SCR file is saved as default2 scr For information on how to customize the CPRO INI file or the DEFAULT SCR file see the Customizing CPro 2000 Settings section of this chapter 13 Select the preferred installation from the following Setup options Typical installs all CPro 2000 Program Files Compact automatically excludes the Help files from the installation 12 elnstallation CPro 2000 User Manual Release 6 2 Custom brings up the Select Components dialog box To exclude the Help Files from the installation leave the Help Files box unchecked Select the components you want to install clear components do not want to install Components Program Files Example Files _ Files Shared DLLs Space Required 8595 K Space Available 94592 lt Back Next

CPro-2000 User Manual - Alcatel

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents